Sony DCR-DVD100 PDF

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E RMT-820
SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2

Ver 1.1 2003. 12
US Model
Canadian Model
Revision History DCR-DVD100
AEP Model
How to use UK Model
Acrobat Reader
East European Model
Hong Kong Model
Australian Model
DCR-DVD100E
E Model
Photo: DCR-DVD100 DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Link
SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS REPAIR PARTS LIST
DISASSEMBLY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987627341.pdf).

Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY (A-7111-651-A) and
not for the single MD-097 board, complete.
Reference No. search on printed wiring boards is available.
On the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 board

This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair
inside the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 board.
Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board, waveforms, mounted parts location and electrical parts list of the MD-097,
SS-174T and VC-307 board are not shown.
The following pages are not shown.
Disassembly ...................................... Pages 2-24 to 2-26 Mounted parts location ......................... Pages 4-109 to 4-111
Schematic diagram ........................... Pages 4-27 to 4-76 Exploded views .................................... Pages 5-11 to 5-12
Printed wiring board .......................... Pages 4-95 to 4-102 Electrical parts list ................................ Pages 5-16 to 5-30
Waveforms .......................................... Pages 4-105 to 4-106
Digital Video Camera Recorder

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
SPECIFICATIONS
Focal length LCD screen AC adaptor
Video camera 3.3 33 mm (5/32 1 5/16 in.)
recorder When converted to a 35 mm still Picture AC-L15A
camera 6.2 cm (2.5 type)
Total number of pixels Power requirements
System 42 420 mm (1 11/16 16 5/8 in.)
Color temperature 123 200 (560 220) 100 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Video recording format Current consumption
Auto, HOLD (Hold), nIndoor
DVD-Video General 0.35 0.18 A
(3 200 K), Outdoor (5 800 K)
DVD-VR (DVD-RW only) Power requirements Power consumption
Minimum illumination
Audio recording system 7.2 V (battery pack) 18 W
5 lx (lux) (F 1.7)
2ch Dolby* Digital 8.4 V (AC adaptor) Output voltage
0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)*
Video signal Average power consumption DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the
DCR-DVD100 : (when using the battery pack) operating mode
* Objects unable to be seen due to
NTSC color, EIA standards During camera recording using Operating temperature
the dark can be shot with
DCR-DVD100E : LCD 0C to 40C (32F to 104F)
infrared lighting.
PAL colour, CCIR standards 6.5 W Storage temperature
Usable discs Viewfinder 20C to + 60C (4F to + 140F)
8 cm DVD-R and DVD-RW Input/Output connectors Dimensions (approx.)
5.5 W
Video compression format S video input/output Operating temperature 56 31 100 mm
MPEG2/JPEG (Still images) 4-pin mini DIN 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) (2 1/4 1 1/4 4 in.) (w/h/d)
Recording/playback time Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Storage temperature excluding projecting parts
HQ: Approx. 20 minutes (ohms), unbalanced 20C to + 60C Mass (approx.)
SP: Approx. 30 minutes Chrominance signal: (4F to + 140F) 190 g (6.7 oz)
LP: Approx. 60 minutes DCR-DVD100: 0.286 Vp-p Dimensions (Approx.) excluding power cord
Viewfinder DCR-DVD100E: 0.3 Vp-p 66 94 142 mm
Electric viewfinder (color) 75 (ohms), unbalanced (2 5/8 3 3/4 5 5/8 in.)
Image device Audio/Video input/output
Rechargeable
(w/h/d)
4.5 mm (1/4 type) CCD (Charge AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p, 75 Mass (approx.)
battery pack
Coupled Device) (ohms), unbalanced, sync negative 640 g (1 lb 6 oz) NP-FM50
Number of Pixels 327 mV, (at output impedance of main unit only
DCR-DVD100 : more than 47 k (kilohms)) 730 g (1 lb 9 oz) Maximum output voltage
Gross: Approx. 680 000 pixels Output impedance of less than 2.2 DC 8.4 V
including the battery pack,
DCR-DVD100E : k (kilohms)/Stereo minijack ( disc and lens cap Output voltage
Gross: Approx. 800 000 pixels 3.5 mm) DC 7.2 V
Effective : Input impedance of more than Capacity
Supplied accessories
DCR-DVD100 : 47 k (kilohms) See page 5-32. 8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)
Approx. 340 000 pixels USB jack Dimensions (approx.)
DCR-DVD100E : mini-B 38.2 20.5 55.6 mm
Approx. 400 000 pixels Control jack (1 9/16 13/16 2 1/4 in.)
Lens Stereo mini-minijack ( 2.5 mm) (w/h/d)
Carl Zeiss MIC jack Mass (approx.)
Combined power zoom lens Stereo minijack ( 3.5 mm) 76 g (2.7 oz)
Filter diameter: Operating temperature
30 mm (1 3/16 in.) 0C to 40C (32F to 104F)
10 (Optical), 120 (Digital) Type
F = 1.7 2.2 Lithium ion
* Manufactured under license Design and specifications are

from Dolby Laboratories. subject to change without notice.
Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
2
DCR-DCVD100/DVD100E
WARNING!! CAUTION:
The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye
WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER
hazard.
EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS
NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION,
BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE CAUTION
THAN 30 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE Use of controls or adjustments or performance
OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK. procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION :
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

LA SCURIT!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PICES SONT
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SCURIT DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PISES SONY
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMROS SONT DONNS DANS CE MANUEL OU
PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPMENTS PUBLIS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered Unleaded solder
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-
and bridges. free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point : LEAD FREE MARK
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40C higher than
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and ordinary solder.
recommend their replacement. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing about 350C.
Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270C Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
during repairing. heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the Strong viscosity
circuit board (within 3 times). Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such
or unsoldering. as on IC pins, etc.
Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
3
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SERVICE NOTE PD-188 (1/2)(LCD DRIVE)
1-1. SERVICE NOTE 1-1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-13
1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS 1-1 PD-188 (2/2)(BACKLIGHT DRIVE)
2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-15
(FORCE EJECT) 1-1 LB-084 (EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT)
3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE OPTICAL PICK-UP 1-1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-17
4. PRECAUTION FOR CHECKING EMISSION FP-608 (USB, LANC) FLEXIBLE
OF LASER DIODE 1-1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-18
1-2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 1-2 MA-420 (PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SENSOR,
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 1-2 MIC)
2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY 1-2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-19
3. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE 1-2 CK-127 (CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-21
2. DISASSEMBLY FB-220 (FUNCTION SWITCH)
2-1. F PANEL SECTION 2-2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-23
2-2. MA-420 BOARD 2-2 FP-610 (EXT MIC) FLEXIBLE
2-3. CABINET (R) SECTION 2-3 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-23
2-4. SIDE CABINET (25) ASSEMBLY 2-4 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
2-5. P CABINET (C)(25M) ASSEMBLY 2-5 (KP-CX5500, PS-CX5500)
2-6. LCD UNIT 2-6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-25
2-7. PD-188 BOARD 2-6
2-8. LIQUID CRYSTAL INDICATOR MODULE 2-7 Shematic diagram of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-
2-9. LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY 2-7 307 board are not shown.
2-10. CK-127 BOARD 2-8 Pages from 4-27 to 4-78 are not shown.
2-11. FB-220 BOARD 2-8
2-12. LOUD SPEAKER (1.6 cm) 2-9 FP-611 (AUDIO/VIDEO JACK) FLEXIBLE
2-13. TRIPOD (LARGE) 2-9 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-79
2-14. CONTROL SWTICH BLOCK (KP-CX5500), 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
CABINET (R) (25) ASSEMBLY 2-10 CD-428 (CCD IMAGER)
2-15. BATTERY PANEL SECTION 2-10 PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-83
2-16. EVF SECTION 2-11 PD-188 (LCD DRIVE, BACKLIGHT DRIVE)
2-17. LB-084 BOARD (REMOVING OF THE EVF)-1 2-12 PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-85
2-18. LB-084 BOARD (REMOVING OF THE EVF)-2 2-13 LB-084 (EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT)
2-19. LB-084 BOARD (REMOVING OF THE EVF)-3 2-14 PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-87
2-20. LENS SECTION 2-15 FB-220 (FUNCTION SWITCH)
2-21. LENS DEVICE (LSV-650E) 2-16 PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-87
2-22. VC-307 BOARD 2-17 MA-420 (PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SENSOR,
2-23. MD-097 BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-19 MIC)
2-24. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500) 2-20 PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-89
2-25. FP-609 FLEXIBLE BOARD 2-21 CK-127 (CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH)
2-26. CIRCUITE BOARDS LOCATION 2-22 PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-91
2-27. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION 2-23 FP-612 (PANEL REVERSE) FLEXIBLE
PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-91
Disassembling procedure of MD-097 block assembly FP-608 (USB, LANC) FLEXIBLE
are not shown. Pages from 2-24 to 2-26 are not shown. PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-93
FP-609 (PLUNGER, EJECT) FLEXIBLE
HELP (List of caution points is shown here.) PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-93
FP-610 (EXT MIC) FLEXIBLE
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-93
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) 3-1 FP-611 (AUDIO/VIDEO JACK) FLEXIBLE
3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/4) 3-3 PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-93
3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/4) 3-5
3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4) 3-7 Printed wiring board of the MD-097, SS-174T and
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) 3-9 VC-307 board are not shown.
3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) 3-11 Pages from 4-95 to 4-104 are not shown.
3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) 3-13
4-4. WAVEFORMS 4-105
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS Waveforms of the VC-307 board is
not shown.
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/3) 4-1
Pages from 4-106 to 4-107 are not shown.
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/3) 4-3
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (3/3) 4-5
4-5. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION 4-107
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
CD-428 (CCD IMAGER)
Mounted parts location of the MD-097, SS-174T and
VC-307 are not shown.
FP-609 FLEXIBLE
4
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS 5-3
5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION 5-3
5-1-2. F PANEL AND BATTERY PANEL SECTION 5-4
5-1-3. LENS SECTION 5-5
5-1-4. EVF SECTION 5-6
5-1-5. MD SECTION 5-7
5-1-6. CABINET (L) SECTION 5-8
5-1-7. CABINET (R) SECTION 5-9
5-1-8. LCD SECTION 5-10
Exploded view and parts list of MD-097 BLOCK are

not shown. Page 5-11 and 5-12 are not shown.
5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST 5-12
Electrical parts list of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-

307 board are not shown.
5
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER SECTION 1
SERVICE NOTE
1-1. SERVICE NOTE

1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS
In this unit, about 10 seconds after power is supplied to the battery terminal using the regulated power supply (8.4V), the power is shut off so
that the unit cannot operate.
This following two methods are available to prevent this. Take note of which to use during repairs.
Method 1.
Use the AC power adaptor (AC-L15, AC-VQ800 etc.).
Method 2.
Connect the servicing remote commander RM-95 (J-6082-053-B) to the LANC jack, and set the commander switch to the ADJ side.
2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)

1 Refer to page 2-2 to remove the front panel assembly.
2 Refer to page 2-3 to remove the cabinet (R) assembly.
3 Refer to page 2-10 to remove the battery panel section.
4 Refer to page 2-11 to remove the EVF block.
5 Remove the VC-307 board.
6 Refer to page 2-15 to remove the lens block and the accessory shoe.
7 While pushing the portion A in the direction of the arrow, push the OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow and open the disc cover.
Open switch
Plunger
MD-097 board
3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE OPTICAL PICK-UP 4. PRECAUTION FOR CHECKING EMISSION OF

The laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdown because of the LASER DIODE
potential difference generated by the charged electrostatic load, etc. Laser light of the equipment is focused by the object lens in the
on clothing and the human body. optical pick-up so that the light focuses on the reflection surface of
During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdown and also use the disc. Therefore, be sure to keep your eyes more then 30 cm
the procedure in the printed matter which is included in the repair apart from the object lens when you check the emission of laser
parts. diode.
The flexible board is easily damaged and should be handled with
care.
1-1
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1-2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the self-diagnosis When problems occur while the unit is operating, the counter of the
function starts working, and displays on the viewfinder, or LCD viewfinder or LCD screen consists of an alphabet and 4-digit number,
screen what to do. This function consists of two display; self- which blinks at 3.2Hz. This 5-character display indicates the
diagnosis display and service mode display. repaired by:, block in which the problem occurred, and detailed
Details of the self-diagnosis functions are provided in the Instruction code of the problem.
manual.
Viewfinder or LCD screen

C:31:11
Blinks at 3.2Hz
C 31 11
Repaired by: Block Detailed Code

C : Corrected by customer Indicates the appropriate Self-diagnosis Code Table.
H : Corrected by dealer step to be taken.
E : Corrected by service E.g.
engineer 31 ....Reload the disc.
32 ....Turn on power again.
Note: The self-diagnosis display data will be kept even if the lithium battery (CK-127 board BT5201 of the cabinet (R) assembly) is removed.
3. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE

Self-diagnosis Code
Repaired by:
Block Detailed Symptom/State Correction

Function Code
C 0 4 0 0 Non-standard battery is used. Use the InfoLITHIUM battery.

C 1 3 0 0 Faulty disc is used. Use a compatible disc with the camcorder.
C 2 1 0 0 Condensation. Remove the disc, and insert it again after one hour.
E 2 0 0 0 EEPROM data are rewritten. Make EEPROM data correct value. (Note)
Inspect the lens block focus reset sensor (Pin 7 of CN1201 of VC-
Difficult to adjust focus 307 board) when focusing is performed when the control dial is rotated
E 6 1 0 0 (Cannot initialize focus.) in the focus manual mode and inspect the focus motor drive circuit
(IC1203 of VC-307 board) when the focusing is not performed.
Inspect the lens block zoom reset sensor (Pin qh of CN1501 of
Zoom operations fault VC-307 board) when zooming is performed when the zoom switch
E 6 1 1 0 (Cannot initialize zoom lens.) is pressed and inspect the zoom motor drive circuit (IC1203 of
VC-307 board) when the zooming is not performed.
Handshake correction function does not
E 6 2 0 0 work well. (With pitch angular velocity Inspect angular velocity sensors (SE5501, 5502 of MA-420
sensor output stopped.) board) peripheral circuits.
Inspect the USB bridge IC (MD-097 board IC4202) and EEPROM
E 9 3 0 0 USB bridge IC fault (MD-097 board IC4201)
Fault of writing to or erasing the flash
E 9 4 0 1 memory Inspect the flash memory (VC-307 board IC3401) (Note)
Note: Refer to 8. Record of Self-diagnosis check of 6-3. SERVICE

MODE, ADJ (987627351.pdf).
1-2E
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY HELP
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
PD-188 board
service position
DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK

THE DVD DRIVE SECTION
88
-1
DISASSEMBLY PD
7
- 09
MD
07
-3
DISASSEMBLY VC
DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
07
-3
VC
PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE VC-307 BOARD.

(SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE DVD DRIVE SECTION)
1 2-1. F PANEL SECTION ..................................... (page 2-2)

2 2-3. CABINET (R) SECTION .............................. (page 2-3)
3 2-15. BATTERY PANEL SECTION........................ (page 2-10)
4 2-16. EVF SECTION.............................................. (page 2-11)
5 2-20. LENS SECTION........................................... (page 2-15)
6 2-22. VC-307 BOARD............................................ (page 2-17)
7 SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK
THE DVD DRIVE SECTION.................................. (page 2-18)
2-1
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. F PANEL SECTION
Caution
The FP-605 flexible board may be damaged
if you remove the F panel section forcibly.
Be very careful not to damage the flexible
board.
2 Screw (M1.7 4),

lock ace, p2 (black)
7 F panel section
4 Screw (M1.7 4), 6 FP-605 flexible board

lock ace, p2 (black) (22P)
5 Screw (M1.7 4),

3 Open the jack cover (F)
1 Screw (M1.7 4),

2-2. MA-420 BOARD
1 Microphone unit
(4P) MA 2 Three tapping screws
-4 (M1.7 3.5)
20
3 MA-420 board
2-2
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-3. CABINET (R) SECTION
Caution
The FP-602 flexible board may be damaged
if you remove the cabinet (R) section forcibly.
Be very careful not to damage the flexible
board.
4 Two screws (M1.7 4),

7
- 30
VC 1 Open the jack cover (U)
q; FP-602 flexible board

(39P)
8 FP-602 flexible board 3 Screw (M1.7 4),

5 Three screws (M1.7 4),
(39P) lock ace, p2 (black)
9 Cabinet (R) section 7 CPC lid (bottom)

2-3
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-4. SIDE CABINET (25) ASSEMBLY
3 Set the LCD panel,

as shown in the figure.
CK
-12
7
2 Screw (M1.7 4),

1 Three tapping
screws (M1.7 5) lock ace, p2 (black)
CK
-12
7
5 Side cabinet (25) assembly
2-4
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-5. P CABINET (C)(25M) ASSEMBLY
2 Screw (M1.7 4),

3 Five claws lock ace, p2 (silver)
4 P cabinet (C) (25) assembly
1 Screw (M1.7 4),

lock ace, p2 (silver)
88
-1
PD
[PD-188 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]
VC-307 board
V
C
-3
PD-188 board
0
7
DC-IN connector
88 Adjustment remote
-1 commander (RM-95)
PD
LANC jack
AC power
adaptor AC IN
CPC-8 jig
(J-6082-388-A)
2-5
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-6. LCD UNIT

1 Close the LCD panel.
4 PV-018 harness
(20P) CK
-12 7 LCD unit
7 3 FP-612 flexible
board (6P)
2 Tape (HS)
6
CK
Caution -12
7
Attach the Tape (HS)
as shown in the illustration.
Tape (HS)
5 Two screws
(M1.7 4),
grip
2-7. PD-188 BOARD

4 P cabinet (C) (25M) assembly
3 Five claws 2 Two screws

(M1.7 4),
8 Hinge assembly
1 Two screws
(M1.7 4),
7 PV-018 harness
8 (20P)
6 Liquid crystal
-18
indicator module PD 9 Screw
(M1.7 2.5)
5 Back light lock ace, p2
Cold cathode
fluorescent tube qa PD-188 board
q; Two claws
2-6
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-8. LIQUID CRYSTAL INDICATOR MODULE
1 P frame assembly (25)
3 P lock spring
2 P lock button
5 Back light
Cold cathode
fluorescent tube
4 Claw
6 Liquid crystal
indicator module
7 P cabinet (M) (25)
2-9. LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY
7 FP-612 flexible board
2 Screw
3 Claw
(M1.7 2.5)
lock ace, p2
1
4 Hinge cover (U) (25)
5 Claw
8 PV-018
harness
9 LCD Hinge
assembly
6 Hinge cover (O) (25)
2-7
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-10.CK-127 BOARD
1 FP-607 flexible board (6P)
5 CK-127 board
CK
-12
4 Five tapping 7
screws (M1.7 3.5)
3 Control switch block

(KP-CX5500) (6P)
2 Loud speaker (1.6 cm) (2P)
2-11.FB-220 BOARD
5 Open the jack cover (U)
3 Screw
(M1.7 2.5)
lock ace, p2
2 FP-607 flexible
board (6P)
6
1 Tape (0716)
4 Three tapping
screws (M1.7 3.5)
8 Screw
(M1.7 2.5)
lock ace, p2
9 FP-610 flexible
Caution board (6P)
Attach the Tape (0716) q; Screw
as shown in the illustration. (M1.7 2.5)
lock ace, p2
FB
Tape (0716) -22
0
7 FB muffle sheet
qs FB-220 board
FP-607 flexible board qa FB retainer sheet metal
2-8
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-12.LOUD SPEAKER (1.6 cm)
Caution
Attach the Tape (0716) as shown
in the illustration.
4 Loud speaker (0.6 cm)
Loud speaker (0.6 cm)
Tape (0716) 1 Tape (0716)
3 Speaker retainer (25)

2 Screw
(M1.7 2.5)
2-13.TRIPOD (LARGE)
2 Two tapping screws

(M1.7 3.5)
3 Bottom frame 1 Three screws

(M1.7 4),
grip
4 Tripod (large)
2-9
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-14.CONTROL SWTICH BLOCK (KP-CX5500), CABINET (R) (25) ASSEMBLY
3 Cabinet (R) (25) assembly
2 Control switch block (KP-CX5500)
1 Two tapping
screws (M1.7 5)
2-15.BATTERY PANEL SECTION

4 Screw (M1.7 4),
2 Raise the Finder.
5 Claw
7
-30 6 Battery panel section
VC
1 Battery terminal board 3 Screw

(6P) (M1.7 2.5),
lock ace, p2
2-10
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-16.EVF SECTION
2 Raise the EVF
5 EVF section
3 Screw (M1.7 4),

7
-30
VC
1 FP-603 flexible board 4 Screw (M1.7 4),

(20P) lock ace, p2 (black)
2-11
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-17.LB-084 BOARD (REMOVING OF THE EVF)-1
2 VF blind
1 Two claws
Caution
When installing the VF blind, fold the FP-603 flexible
board as shown in the illustration.
FP-603 flexible
board
7 Eye cup (55)

6 Screw assembly
(M1.7 2.5),
lock ace, p2
4 VF hinge assembly,
VF tilt cabinet
3 Screw
(M1.7 4),
lock ace, p2
(black)
5 Screw
(M1.7 2.5),
lock ace, p2
2-12
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4
Visibility knob (40)
VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly
To raise the VF slide cabinet (upper) 1 Tapping screw

assembly, insert a flat head 3 (M1.7 3.5)
(-) screwdriver into the position shown B 5
by the arrow. C
VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly 2

A
2
A 2 Open the lock of the VF slide cabinet (lower) in the direction of the arrow A,
3 while slanting the VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly in the direction
of the arrow B,
4 remove the Visibility knob (40) from the VF slide cabinet (lower), and
5 remove the VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly by sliding it in the direction
VF slide cabinet (lower) of the arrow C.
VF slide cabinet (lower)
RE-ASSEMBLING THE VF SLIDE CABINET
1 VF slide assembly
2 Align the dotted portion of the VF slide assembly

with the dotted line of the VF slide cabinet (lower).
When re-assembling, slide the

Visibility knob (40) to the fully
right-end beforehand.
Visibility knob (40)
When re-assembling is completed,
the VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly
and the VF slide cabinet (lower) are
assembled as shown. 3 Slide the VF slide cabinet assembly up to
the position in the direction of the arrow
VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly where the two claws are locked.
4 Tapping screw
(M1.7 3.5)
VF slide cabinet (lower) Two claws
2-13
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E

1 Two screws
(M1.7 2.5),
lock ace, p2
2 Pull out the VF slide assembly fully

in the direction of the arrow.
VF slide Cabinet (upper) assembly
VF slide assembly, etc.
3 Slide the VF slide cabinet assembly and others once

to the deep end, then slant them in the direction of
the arrow A to release the claw portion of the VF slide
B assembly and finally pull them out in the direction of the
arrow B and remove them.
6 Remove the LCD cabinet assembly and others from the two dowels and
cut-outs of the VF slide assembly.
Caution
5 Screw
(M1.7 2.5),
When attach the Sheet (VF), lock ace, p2
fold the FP-603 flexible board
as shown in the illustration.
FP-603 flexible
Sheet (VF) board
4 Screw
VF slide assembly (M1.7 2.5),
Cut-outs lock ace, p2
Two dowels
Caution
qs Lamp guide (40) Be careful not to drop
qj LCX032AN-5 (16P) the Prism sheet (40) and
7 Sheet (VF) the Illuminator (40).
qa Cushion LB (40)
q; Two craws
qh LCD cabinet assembly
8 FP-603 qg LCX032AN-5
flexible board
qf Prism sheet (40)
Caution 9 Two craws
qd Illuminator (40)
Be careful not to drop

the Cushion LB (40). Projected part qk LB-084 board
2-14
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-20.LENS SECTION
1 Screw (M1.7 4),

q; Water packing
9 Lens section
Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)

Tapping screw (M1.7 3.5)
7
- 30
VC

6 CD heat transe holder
2 Flexible board
(from the lens device)
(24P) (M1.7 3.5)
(27P)
4 FP-604
flexible board
(10P)
VC
-3
07
5 Harness (CV-068)
(2P)
2-15
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-21.LENS DEVICE (LSV-650E)
4 CD heat sink (650)

3 Outer connector (hot shoe),
Lens frame (650), etc

(M1.7 3.5)
Caution
2 Screw
(M1.7 2.5),
lock ace, p2
CD radiation
sheet
qf Lens (650) sheet qg Lens device (LSV-650E)
7 FP-606 flexible board qa Remove the soldering

(24P)
9 Optical filter block

q; Seal rubber (W)
qs CCD block assembly
qd CD-428 board
5 Two tapping screws 6 Harness (CV-068) (XXP)

(M1.7 5)
8 CD radiation sheet
2-16
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-22.VC-307 BOARD
Caution
Attach the flexible retainer
cushion as shown in the
illustration.
07
-3
VC Flexible retainer
cushion

(PS-CX5500) (14P)
7 Board to board connector

(100P)
0 97
M D-
3 07
V C-
q; Heat sink,
sheet radiation (A),
sheet radiation (B)
1 FP-605 flexible board (22P) 8 Flexible retainer

cushion
6 Three screws
9 VC-307 board (M1.7 2.5),
lock ace, p2
2 FP-611 flexible board (8P)
3 Two screws
(M1.7 2.5),
lock ace, p2
4 FP-611 flexible board,
JK frame
2-17
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE DVD DRIVE SECTION]

Connection to Check the VTR Section
To check the DVD drive section, set the DVD drive to forced PLAY mode.
Operate the DVD drive using the adjustment remote commander (with the HOLD switch set in the OFF position).
Setting the forced PLAY mode Exiting the forced PLAY mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 00. 2) Select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 00.
3) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the 3) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
CPC-8 jig
(J-6082-388-A)
CN4902
M
D
CN4901 Extension cable (100P)

-0
9
(J-6082-352-A)
7
VC-307 board
AC power
AC IN adaptor
CN4001
CN1008
V
C
-3
0
LANC jack
7
CN1009
AUDIO/
VIDEO jack
Battery panel section
DC-IN jack
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
Monitor TV
PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE VC-307 BOARD.

(SERVICE POSITION) TO CHECK THE DVD DRIVE SECTION)
1 2-1. F PANEL SECTION ..................................... (page 2-2)

2 2-3. CABINET (R) SECTION .............................. (page 2-3)
3 2-15. BATTERY PANEL SECTION........................ (page 2-10)
4 2-16. EVF SECTION.............................................. (page 2-11)
5 2-20. LENS SECTION........................................... (page 2-15)
6 2-22. VC-307 BOARD............................................ (page 2-17)
2-18
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-23.MD-097 BLOCK ASSEMBLY
2 Zoom blind
1 Screw (M1.7 4),

Caution
9 7
-0
MD Attach the Tape (0716)
as shown in the
illustration.
3 NS knob (650), M
NS base (650) D-
09
7
4 Tape (0716)
FP-608 flexible board
Tape (0716)
5 FP-608
flexible board
(10P)

(8P) 7
- 09
MD 7 Screw
(M1.7 2.5),
lock ace, p2
8 Three tapping screws

Caution (M1.7 5)
9 MD-097 block assembly
Precautions during handling Refer to level 3
Be sure to place the DVD drive with
its optical pickup facing upward. Disassembling procedure of
MD-097 block assembly.
Hold the frame.
Do not touch the optical pickup surface.
Optical pickup Caution

Use the adjustable wrist strap (J-2501-162-A) as the preventive
measure for static electricity when the removing and installing
the drum assemb ly because the drum assembly of this
mechanism beck is easily affected by the static electricity.
(J-2501-162-A)
2-19
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-24.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500)
Caution Caution
Align the hole of the receptacle with the projection of the Attach the Tape (0716) as shown
projected part, and install the Control switch block (PS-CX5500). in the illustration.
Cabinet (L)
Control switch block
(PS-CX5500)
Receptacle hole Projected part

Mode dial Mode dial Control switch block
(PS-CX5500)
Tape (0716)

(PS-CX5500)
3 Tape (0716)
4 Three tapping screws

1 Tapping screw (M1.7 5)
(M1.7 3.5)
Caution
When installing the Control switch block (PS-CX5500),
set the power switch of cabinet (L) section to its
OFF position.
Power switch
ONF
R
OFWE
PO
2-20
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-25.FP-609 FLEXIBLE BOARD
When pusing the portion A in the direction of the arrow,

push the open switch in the direction of the arrow and open
the disc cover.
Open switch
Plunger
Open switch
Disc cover
1
2 Screw (M1.7 4),

Plunger
3 PWB retainer sheet metal
6 Solenoid cover
5 Tapping screw
(M1.7 3.5)
4 Tapping screw
7 FP-609 flexible board (M1.7 3.5)
2-21
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-26.CIRCUITE BOARDS LOCATION
LB-084
CD-428
SS-174T
MD-097
FB-220
MA-420
CK-127
VC-307
PD-188
NAME FUNCTION
CD-428 CCD IMAGER
CK-127 CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH
FB-220 FUNCTION SWITCH
LB-084 EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT
MA-420 PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SENSOR, MIC
RF, SKEW SENSOR, DVD DSP, MECHA DRIVE, UCON, FLASH, LATCH, USB I/F,
MD-097 CONNECTOR, DC/DC CONVERTER
PD-188 LCD DRIVE, BACK LIGHT DRIVE
SS-174T TSB SHOCK SENSOR
DC/DC CONVERTER, A/D CONVERTER, TIMING GENERATOR, EVR, CAMERA PROCESS,
LENS DRIVE, DVD SYSTEM CONTROL, 128M SDRAM, 16M FCRAM, DVD CODEC,
VC-307 64M SDRAM, VIDEO IN/OUT, VIDEO A/D CONVERTER, EVF DRIVE, CAMERA CONTROL,
HI CONTROL, HI/DIGITAL STILL CONTROL, 32M FLASH MEMORY, AUDIO I/O, MIC AMP,
PITCH/YAW SENSOR AMP, CONNECTOR, DD CONNECTOR
2-22
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-27.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
FP-604
FP-606
FP-610
FP-607
FP-602
FP-605 FP-611 FP-612
FP-603 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

(PS-CX5500)
FP-609
FP-608
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK FP-629 FP-228

(KP-CX5500)
Disassembling procedure of MD-097

block assembly are not shown. Pages
from 2-24 to 2-26 are not shown.
2-23E
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2003.08.29
HELP
Sheet attachment positions and procedures of processing the flexible boards/harnesses are shown.
CABINET (R) SECTION

Tape (HS) Loud speaker (0.6 cm)
Tape (0716)
Tape (0716)
LENS SECTION
CD radiation
sheet
EVF SECTION
FP-603 flexible
board
FP-603 flexible
Sheet (VF) board
HELP
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
OVERALL
M
D-
09
7 7
-30
VC Flexible retainer
cushion
Flexible board
(from the FP-608 flexible board)
Tape (0716)
MD SECTION
Two OP sheets
0 97
M D-
Tape (0716)
CABINET (L) SECTION
Control swtch block

(PS-CX5500)
Tape (0716)
HELP
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Link
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4)

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER SECTION 3 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.
CD-428 BOARD VC-307 BOARD(1/3)

LENS ASSY
IRIS (2/18) (4/18)

(SHUTTER) (1/18)
IC1401 30 SPCK SPCK
B27
IC3501
IC5001 CAMERA
42
DVD
8 13 14
CCD OUT
30
IC1302 2
I
11
AD0-AD13
AD0-AD9 AD0-AD9
131
I
121
PROCESS
AF5 AG3
SYSTEM
CONTROL V27 P24 CN1008
CCD
IMAGER 68 AD5 AF3 W26 T23 73
CN5001 CN1301 SH,AGC I IFI Y0-IFI Y7 IFI Y0-IFI Y7
A/D CONV. 61 AG4 AD6 W27 R24 75 82
1-4 10-12 XSYS RST
43 54 AF4 AD7 Y26 U23 84 86
HD0-HD15 HD0-HD15
V1-V4 AG5 AG6 Y27 AA26 88 90
RG,H1,H2
CN5001 23 19 16 47 48 59 AD9 AF6 T24 AA27 92 94
I IFI C0-C3 IFI C0-IFI C7
20-23 5-9 56 AD8 AG7 AB26 V23 96
CH SO,SCK
7-4 18-21 XSHD,XSHP,PBLK,CLPDM AC12 AF7 AB27 U24 TO
CN1301 CLPOB CLPOB
112 IFI HD IFI HD
2 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
16 15 2 1 IFI VD IFI VD AD10 (3/4)
70
IFI OE IFI OE V24 95 (MD-097)
71 AG8 (PAGE 3-5)
44 HD,VD HD,VD 110 AD26 HA0-HA2 HA0-HA2 97
4 72 AG9
X1301 (1/18) 45 111 W24 98
36MHz XATA REST XATA REST
31 68 AE27 61
5
IC1301 12
VCK VCK
46 59 B2
25
40
XSYS RST (9/18) | IFI Y0-IFI Y7
TIMING
31 52
18
GENERATOR
38
51
52
IC2001 (6/18)
49
21 35 CAM SO,SI,SCK 50 VIDEO
A/D
| IFI C0-IFI C7
IC3701
SHUTTER ON Y OUT
23 37 133 2 CONV. 42 DVD
IFI HD L26 J27 M2 J2 W1 W4
EN0,DIR 0A,DIR 0B C OUT CODEC
EN1,DIR 1A,DIR 1B 139 6 38 IFI VD
I K24 K27 N4 M1 Y1 Y2
IFI OE SD0-SD7
144 21 37
M23 L27 N2 N1 Y4 AA1
(3/18) IRIS
FC RST SENS XRST VTR
41 36
ZM RST SENS 137 M26 M27 P4 P2 AA2 AA4
DRIVE AFCK
138 76 34 AF8
M
23 DRIVE +,-
1 IC1201 2 14 (3/18) 12
IRIS PWM
A0-A11 D0-D9 66 64 63
G24
P26 G26
F27 F1
G1
J3
L4
AB1 AB2
24 DATA 0 AC1 AC2 D0

VDIO0-VDIO7
IRIS
DRIVE IC1202 85 74 103 94 SCLK27
D23
H24 G27 H1 K2 | AC4 AD1
1 29
|
H 19
21
HALL +,-
H26 K26 J1 M4 DATA 31 AD2 AD4
62 90
D31
HALL (4/18) B25 D27 H4 D1 AD5 AD7

10 HALL AD
AMP 8 F24 E27 G2 E1
16 A0-A11 D0-D9 7 IC3502 10
CLK24
B22 F26 E24
VDIN0-VDIN7
F2 K3
AD9 AE1
AF1-AF6
(7/18)
(2/18) AUDIO
PLL
P27
N23
E26
T26
E2
T1
H2
R2
AG2-AG4 IC3801
IC1403 T27 M24 T3 T2
AG6 AG7
AD6 AG5
64Mbit
SDRAM(0)
VC0-VC7
16Mbit U26 P23 U4 U1
30 38 SDRAM AG8 AD10
2 SHUTTER ON AC13 AC14 33 34 A0
U27 R26 U2 V1 ADRSO 0 AF7 AC8
40 41 SHUTTER D0 SDATA0
FOCUS
FC RST SENS DRIVE
4 (5/18) AD11-AD18
E1 H24 | 37 44 |
RESET 7 | | AG9 AF8
SENSOR AF9-AF19 ADRSO 10 51 A10
FOCUS A,B
IC3601 D15
AG10-AG20
SDATA31 H4
G4
SO 0, SI 0, XSCK 0 G27
F26
AD11 AG10
14 14 15 9 EN0,DIR 0A,DIR 0B AF9

FOCUS
MOTOR
M 11
FOCUS XA,XB
17 18
FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE
I
12 IC3602 A0
AD19-AD21
AD23
SADRS1
XSYS RST
C XRST
E4
D4 AF13
12Mbit | |
ZOOM A,B ZOOM MOTOR SDRAM AF20-AF23 SADRS11 AD13-AD21
4 20 21 5 EN1,DIR 1A,DIR 1B A11
M 1
ZOOM XA,XB
23 24
DRIVE
(3/18)
I
7
AG21-AG24 N26
HD
C ADCK
R5 DATA 0
|
AF12 1 29
D0
|
W4 V4 B23 A4 AF14-AF23 62 90
DATA 31 D31
IC1203 Y1 U4 AG14-AG23 (7/18)
Y2 W5 AG26
D0 27
W1 T2 SED0 H27
C VDCKI
K1 AG24 AF24
IC3803
| | | S VDCKI
ZOOM J24 L2 64Mbit
MOTOR W2 T4 AF25 AD22
D15 42 SED15 33 34
B21
C ADI1
A1 ADRSO 0 A0 SFRAM(1)
ZOOM ZM RST SENS V1 U5 AG25 AD23
RESET 16 SFD BCK | 37 44 |
V2 R4 A21 D7 AF26 AB24
SENSOR ADRSO 10 A10
51
(5/18) U1 V5 AF27 AE26
XNS SW
5
CN1201
IC3603 T5
R4
U2
T1
AA23
NIGHT SHOT
16Mbit
R1 R5 J24
FCRAM
41 (11/18) K2 M4
VSP SO X,XVSP SCK X
G26
IRIS PWM A0 1
IC3001 94
| |
P2 P1 SEA1
|
N2 P4 CN1009
(11/18) HALL AD A19 20 SEA20 31 68
128
N1 N4
A5
DATA FROM SFD
9
(15/18) 15
L
62 27
L
2
V
IC3004 3 69
CAMERA CONTROL
77 M1 M2
D8
DATA TO SFD
8 IC2302 16
R
64 26
R
7
L
J9151
AUDIO VIDEO
78 CAM SO,SI,SCK L2 L1 D0 LK-D15 LK SFD BCK L (15/18) 5 R
EEPROM 4 SO, SI, SCK 70 12 3 56
D/A CONV.
2 67
75 K1
K2
M5
M4
A23-A26 B23-B26
A/D CONV. 2
R
58 IC2301 30
L
R
C27 D21-D27 F24 28
73 CH SO,SCK AUDIO
I/O
71
DATA TO SFD
D19 SP+
X3001
20MHz
1 66 9 SP- FP-611
MA-420 3 65
63
7
MIC L (FLEXIBLE)
(16/18) 35
BOARD(1/4) 175 32
MIC R
PANEL R PANEL R TO
SE5501
YAW SENSOR 9 14 12
IC1101 18
YAW AD
130 135
AD1 PANEL G
PANEL B
PANEL G
PANEL B 3 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
AC2
(13/18) (2/4)
SE5502 YAW/PITCH
SENSOR PITCH AD AD2 (PAGE 3-3)
PITCH SENSOR 12 11 8 AMP 2 129 PANEL XHD PANEL XHD
CN5503 CN1006 CN1002 9 X3201
48MHz
IC3202 4
J5 PANEL XVD PANEL XVD
G2
XTAL EVF R EVF R
OSC AB1 EVF G EVF G
EVF B EVF B
AB2
XSYS RST
AA2
TO EXT STROBO (13/18)
1 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
239 USB CLK AF2
YOUT
COUT
(4/4) ZOOM VR AD USB D+,USB D-
238 IC3203 184
SCLK27 AE2
(PAGE 3-8) XLK RST XLK RST (1/2)
187
140 D1
DIGITAL XSYS RST
MS BS B24 F4 VD SO,SI,SCK VD SO,SI,SCK
STILL
MS DIO CONTROL S XRST S XRST
HI SO,SI,SCK 128 B26 E4
MS SCLK 215
C XRST XRST VTR XRST VTR
7 E13
|
AC13 AD3-AD7 B5-B9
213
A1-A22 D0-D15 D6-D9 E10
9 10
62 92 60 39
Y OUT
46
C OUT
7
CN1004 13
(8/18) Y
18 CN1006
FOR USB D+,USB D-
ADJUSTMENTS 14
DO LK-D15 LK DO LK-D15 LK IC2101 14
C
V
20 3
C Y
J5501
C OUT 22 22 1 S VIDEO
34 VIDEO G G
Y
MS BS IN/OUT 39 CN5503
MS DIO VD SO,SI,SCK AGC C
13 MS SCLK 48
ACC
CN1003 V
FOR 12 Y OUT 42
26 16 29 36 36
ADJUSTMENTS
15
10 1 48 38 45
(14/18)
MA-420
IC3401 BOARD(2/4)
FLASH MEMORY
32M bit AUDIO SIGNAL
VIDEO SIGNAL
VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL
16
3-1 3-2
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
VC-307 BOARD (2/3) PD-188 BOARD

CN1007 CN5201 CN5202 CN6201
XHD OUT
4 36 20 20
PSIG
11 29 13 13
T6101
PANEL R ND901 Q6102
VG BACKLIGHT CN6101
PANEL G 12 28 12 12 (1/2) LCD901
48 20 4 10 INVERTER BL REG
PANEL B PANEL R,G,B 14 26 PANEL R,G,B 11 11 VR,VG,VB BL HIGH
PANEL HD
15 25 10 10 47 IC6001 22 5 2.5 INCH BACK
17 23 9 9 46 24 3 COLOR LCD LIGHT
PANEL VD RGB COM PSIG UNIT DRIVE
DRIVE 27 6
SP+
SP-
CK-127 35
DAC
40
BOARD 39 12
COM DC
28 (2/2)
EVF R
TO OVERALL EVF G (1/2) 2
BL LOW IC6102
3 BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) EVF B 7 3 3 4
8 CURRENT
(PAGE 3-2) XRST VTR
10 30
XRST VTR
14 14 36 DET
12
MIC L (1/2) 12
46 13
MIC R
45 IC6002 24 CN6001
19
42 |
TIMING Q6101
HD HD GENERATOR 22
5 35 19 19 1 4
VD VD
6 34 18 18 48
7 33 17 17 2 8 5
VD SO,SCK VD SO,SCK DETIN
9 31 15 15 HD OUT
5 2
3
PANEL VG
PSIG
IC6101
CN1003 5 (2/2) 7
H START BL CONT
FOR 4 5 5 1
ADJUSTMENTS EVF VG 6 EP 2.8V
6
EVF VCO
7
4 TO OVERALL
CN5201 BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4) AUDIO SIGNAL
BL CONT
17 (VC-307) VIDEO SIGNAL
(PAGE 3-8)
CN5203 FB-220 BOARD FP-610 FLEXIBLE
MA-420 BOARD 2 38 1 SP901
(1/2)
(3/4) 1 39 2 SPEAKER (1/2)
CN5301 CN5302 J9101
EXT MIC L EXT MIC L
CN5501 CN5503 CN1006 39 1 5 2 2 MIC (PLUG IN POWER)
(16/18) EXT MIC R EXT MIC R
MIC 35 38 2 4 3 3
MIC901 3 20 3
MIC UNIT
L IC2401 22
MIC L CN5204
MIC R
MIC 14
1 22 1 1 MIC AMP
R EVF VG
EVF VCO
36
INTELLIGENT
SHOE MIC L
48 8 3 ACCESSORY
33
EXT MIC L CN1001 SHOE (1/2)
EXT MIC R
3
LB-084 BOARD LCD902

(10/18) CN2201 COLOR
48 20 12 9 14 EVF
EVF R,G,B R,G,B
47 IC2201 22 13 8 15 UNIT
46 24 11 10 13
RGB COM
14 14 7 16
40 DRIVE
10 11 BCK, HCK1/2, HST, EN, STB, VCK, VST 12
39
3 18 9
CN5602 6
46 24 8 3
(10/18)
VD SO,SCK
VD SO,SCK 45
42 IC2202 14
HD
1 TIMING IC5601
VD 48 GENERATOR
Q5602
XRST VTR
36 D5602
VCO 8 16 3 BACK LIGHT BACK
2 DRIVE LIGHT
CN5601
3-3 3-4
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY (A-7111-651-A) and not for the single MD-097 board.
CN4902
FOR
ADJUSTMENTS
17 12 14 18
MD-097 BOARD (1/2) VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL BASE UNIT

CN4901
CN4501
73 LD ON 6
75 82
LD LASER
84 86 EFM PK DRIVE DIODE
85 (2/7) 42 EFM WP 7
88 HD0-HD15 HD0-HD15
67 41 16
90
2
TO
OVER ALL 92 94 IC4601 169
RFOP
35 72
RF +
35
BLOCK DIAGRAM RFON RF -
96 DVD (1/7)
(1/4) 170 34 71 34
95 98 DSP FEO PD IC
(VC-307) 185 25 61 23
(PAGE 3-2)
98
97
HA0-HA2 HA0-HA2 96
99
186
TEO
29 IC4502 69
A-K
30
VRCK
XATA RESET 3 21 RF
61
SCL PROCESS
SCB FDPD IC OUT
29 48 15 13 17 19 55 40 FPD IC
18 SCD 18
D4903
CN4904 49 (5/7) 3 X4201 (5/7) (2/7) 19 17
CN9001 2 13 126
4 86 4 30MHz SBD0-SBD15
USB D+,D- 42 53 110
USB
6 88 IC4202 78
43
SDA,SCL
5
6
IC4201 IC4602 20 26 148 TILT PD1
6 SKEW ADD
USB 2.0 EEPROM 64Mbit SBA0-SBA13
29 35 133 SKEW SUB 14 6 TILT PD2 22
TILT PD
SDRAN (1/7)
FP-608 BRIDGE 8 2 21
FLEXIBLE (1/2) X4601

22.5792MHz
208
209
IC4504
TILT PD AMP
XRST BRIDGE
69 82 27 49
IC4701 RESET MD0-MD7,AD0-AD19 MD0-MD7
72 114 47 55
TO EJECT OK
5 OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
68
64
SCK
132
134
(4/7)
55
MA MA
57
192
FOO FOO
2 FOCUS 14
FCS+
FCS- 1 FOCUS
SHOCKA-F
(4/4) XUSB SEL 3 DRIVE 13 4 COIL
(VC-307)
60
62
EJECT RQ
133
142
IC4701
(PAGE 3-8) XEJECT SW DVD TRO TRO TRK+
67 29 36 D0 193 5 12 TRK- 3 TRACKING
DRIVE MD0-MD7,AD8-AD15 TRACKING
39 46 D15 (4/7) SHOCKA-T
CN4901 6 DRIVE 11 2 COIL
CONTROL
S9053 CN4907 AD16-AD19

1 8 IC4702 (3/7)
OPEN 3 16 23 A0
FLASH MUTE
S9051,9052
5 16 3 4 (4/7) 2 5
25 26 A18
48
MEMORY
9
IC4802
(LID OPEN)
Q4901,4902 7 8 6 9 LA1-LA15
MD0-MD7,AD8-AD15 CN4801
PLUNGER 2
PLUNGER
DRIVE
PLG
122 13 14
17 18
IC4703 12 15
16 19
FMO
SLED
17 VO4+,VO4- 4
24 18 6
55
IC4704
196
197
FMOS
27
MOTOR
DRIVE
15
VO3+,VO3-
5 M SLED MOTOR
FP-609 ADDRESS
LATCH 198
DMO
16 3
FLEXIBLE 72
DSP RSTX DSP RSTX
65
205
FG
LD ON
119
CN4908 SKEW ADD
4 SKEW SUB
DEW DEW AD
1 13 5
SENSOR IN LIMIT X
6 CN4802
IN LIMIT X IN LIMIT
Q4906 1
CN4909 PD
DC FAN M 1
MOTOR
DRIVE
FAN DRV
106 17
FOMON
1 3
FOO
TRMON TRO
19 7 5 A1
DMO A2
19 (3/7) 5 9
110 X4701
8MHz
(3/7)
IC4801
3
2
A3
8
7
M SPINDLE MOTOR
112
IC4811 SPINDLE
H1+,H1-
BUFFER AMP MOTOR 10
SPDL EN H2+,H2-
20 DRIVE 7 11
FG CPU FG CPU FG FG
12
H3+,H3-
14 H
128 18 2 21 17
SLED EN SLED EN
101 5 15 CN4803
VO3 (+) 13
SKEW1 SKEW1 SKEW1 SKEW1 (3/7)
103 7 13 4 7 VO3 (-) 12
SKEW2 SKEW2 SKEW2 SKEW EN IC4804 6 9 M SKEW MOTOR

104 8 12 1 8
SKEW
SPDL EN SPDL EN MOTOR
89 3 17 SPDL EN
DRIVE
SKEW EN SKEW EN SKEW EN
102 6 14
VO4 (+) 15
SKEW2 (3/7)
XSHK T M 4 7 VO4 (-) 14
107 (3/7)
SKEW EN IC4805 6 11
83
XSHK F M
IC4803 1
SKEW
10
MOTOR
DRIVE
CN5751
SHOCKA-T 13 1 SE5751
2
12
12
IC5751 2 T SHOCK
XSHL-T 6 15 SENSOR
5 7 T SHOCK
5 SENSOR 16
AMP
(3/7)
XSHK T M SHOCKA-F 11 1 SE5752
9
IC4812
11 3
10
12
IC5752 2 F SHOCK
XSHK F M XSHK-F 4 15 SENSOR
7 MMV 5 6 7 F SHOCK
3 SENSOR 16
AMP
SS-174T BOARD
3-5 3-6
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
FB-220 BOARD CK-127 BOARD (2/2) VC-307 BOARD (3/3) EJECT SW

67
(2/2) IC4701 RESET
72
S9101
S5301, 5303, 5305 XRST BRIDGE
5 TO
OVERALL
CN5302 CN5301 CN5204 CN5201 CN1007 BLOCK DIAGRAM
SUPER NS/ BACK LIGHT, 16 69
1 6 1 6 34 60 KEY AD1 EJECT RQ (3/4)
COLOR SLOWS FADER, REVIEW 27 62 (MD-097)
SCK
204 64
S5302, 5304, 5306, (12/18)
XEJECT SW 4
(13/18) XSUB SEL (PAGE 3-5)
5308, 5310 IC4701 RST 18 202 66
FP-610 STOP, REW, PLAY, 203
EJECT OK
68
FLEXIBLE (2/2) FF, PAUSE
5 2 7 33 61 KEY AD2
IC3103 IC3203 (2/2) CN1008
HI CONTROL HI CONTROL
S9201 CN5206 S5212-5216
FP-612 PANEL 6 UP, LEFT, ENTER
9 31 66 KEY AD4 (13/18)
FLEXIBLE REVERSE 5 RIGHT, DOWN
TXD 23 190 TXD EEP TXD 207 5
RXD 24
SCK 25
TXD, RXD, SCK 191 RXD
185 SCK
EEP RXD 206
EEP SCK 205
2
6
IC3302
S002, 003 CN5205 EEPROM
6 20 HI EVER SO
EXPOSORE,
FOCUS 5 21 HI EVER SCK X 0A 52 X3102
S5207 S5209-5211
X 1A 51 32.768KHz
PANEL VISUAL INDEX, HI SO 200
8 32 65 KEY AD3 X TAL 29
CLOSE SET UP,REC X3101 140 KEY AD4
ADJUST 3 12 28 79 DIL A 10MHz HI SI 201 HI, SO, SI, SCK
X TAL 28
S001 DIAL 2 S5206 13 27 80 DIL B H1 EVER SCK 199
S5201, 5204, 5205
EDIT
DISPLAY/
BATT VIEW
11 29 3 XBATT VIEW 1 TO
OVERALL
10 30 67 KEY AD5 BLOCK DIAGRAM(1/4)
VOL+, VOL-
14 26 XSYS RST (PAGE 3-1)
BT5201 XSYS RST 47
LITHIUM S5203 XLK RST
5 35 73 HI XRESET XLK RST 44
BATTERY RESET ZOOM VR AD
CONTROL (SECONDARY) EXT STROBO
SWITCH
BLOCK
(KP-CX5500) CN1008
15 41 43 47
S004
(Playback) COTROL SWITCH
15 41 43 47 MODE
CN1002
(Still) BLOCK (PS-CX5500)
MD-097 BOARD (2/2) Since a servic is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY (A-7111-651-A)
and not for the single MD-097 board.
CN4901
(Movie)
XVTR ON SW 1 11 S007
XCAM ON SW 2 10 POWER
XPHOTO STBY SW 7 9 ON-OFF(CHG)
S003
KEY AD7 69 4 STARTS/STOP SW
S001, 002
PHOTO FREEZE
XPHOTO FREEZE 6 12
PHOTO REC PHOTO SW
KEY ADD 59 13
FP-608
RV001
FLEXIBLE 2
ZOOM AD
POWER ZOOM
(2/2)
LANC OUT CN4901 CN1008

J9001 CN4904
LANC SIG 50 LANC IN 55 55 40 LANC OUT
LANC 7 51 FAST CHARGE
48 53 53 39 LANC IN
D5503
RESET 45
XRESET SIRCS PWM 45
Q1002, 1003
LED
6
NS LED K
17
(Infrared ray emitter)
IC5501
IR ON 15 DRIVE REMOTE
14 SIRCS SIG COMMANDER
39 VOUT SIRCS SIG 41 16 7 4
42 71 71 53 VCC RECEIVER
Q3102 CN1006 CN5503
62
43 3V REG 41 EVER 3.0V IB SO 42
35 35 35 VTR DO ON I/F
IB SI 43
31 31 37 FAST CHARGE
SHOE ID2 58
27
14 14 75 SHOE ON
SHOE ID1 57 MD-420 BOARD (4/4)
27 27 74 BATT/XEXT SW
28
29 29 CN1007
BL CONT BL CONT
(7/7)
BL REG
20 20 23
4 TO
OVERALL
VTR DD ON MT 4.6V BLOCK DIAGRAM(2/4)
38
SHOE ON
BATT/XEXT SW
IC4001 A 1.5V
D 1.5V
(CK-127)
(PAGE 3-4)
DC/DC D 2.5V
FAST CHARGE
CONVERTER, WG1 A 2.5V
BATT SIG WG1 D 2.5V
RESET,
A 2.8V
LANC I/O
D 2.8V
AU 2.8V
EP 2.8V
D 3.1V CN1001
BT901 A 4.6V EXT STROBO
6 6
AU 4.6V
CN4001 EP 4.6V 5 SHOE ID 1, 2 5 INTELLIGENT
6 DRV A 4.6V
BATTERY DRV MT 4.6V
4 4 ACCESSORY
S 5
EP 13.5V LANC SIG
TERMINAL
1 IMG VH 57 57 3 3 SHOE
2 SHOE UNREG 2
IMG VL
PLG VCC
SHOE UNREG
1 1
(2/2)
Q4002,
4036
BATT UNREG
4 VTR UNREG
DC IN 3
2 Q4022,
4021
SHOE UNREG
3-7 3-8
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.
JIG UNREG CN4902

MD-097 BOARD 16 FOR
ADJUSTMENTS
F4007
BT901 1.4A/32V
BATTERY
TERMINAL
CN4001 F4005
1.4A/32V
BATT UNREG BATT UNREG
6
S 5 BATT SIG Q4003, F4004

1.4A/32V
4004 Q4003,
CN4901
1 4004 SHOE UNREG SHOE UNREG
F4002 11 13
CHARGE
SWITCH 1.4A/32V
F4006
1.4A/32V
DC IN F4003
1.4A/32V
ACV UNREG VTR UNREG
4
INIT CHARGE ON
F4001 Q4022, 4021
3
FAST CHARGE
1.4A/32V
BATT/XEXT
2
EP 4.6V
SHOE ON 42
Q4009-4010 EP 13.5V
CN4901 17
27 29 31 33 14 5V EP 2.8V
5V 40
REG
27 29 31 33 14 (7/7) VREF 37 BL REG
16 18
CN1008 BL CONT
VC-307BOARD (1/2) IC4001 RT 30

Q4013
L4005 L4014 D 1.5V
20
CK-127 BOARD DC/DC CONVERTER SWITCHING

L4015
56 VCC RESET,LANC I/O A 1.5V
(1/2) D4005
25 25
OUTIP 57
23 23 43 3V REG 1
OUTIN 55 Q4018 TO
EVER 3.0V
CN5201 CN1007 74 74 41 POWER
BATT LI 3V IN1 20 L4004 L4021 BLOCK
14 26 15 15 40 BL REG
BT5201 Q4012 DIAGRAM(2/3)
D4004 SWITCHING AU 4.6V
LITHIUM HI XRESET 39 BL CONT 44 (VC-307)
BATTERY 5 35
HI CONTROL AU 2.8V (PAGE3-11)
(SECONDARY) 38
BATTERY
IN
S5203 14 OUT2 58
54 BATT SENS VOUT DETECT L4029 PLG VCC
VCC 53 71 71 42
RESET
55 ACV SENS 62 BL CONT L4011 A 2.8V 32 34 A 2.8V
+INE2 14
HI XRESET 36
XRESET 73 47 47 45 RESET L4006 L4016 A 1.5V
D 2.8V 50
BATT IN 31 45 45 44 Q4014 D 1.5V
SWITCHING L4023 52 54
75 SHOE ON AU 2.8V 56
D 3.1V
L4026
CONTROL SWITCH 74 BATT/XEXT HI EVER SO
HI EVER SCK
20
21
41 41
43 43
27
28
DIN
CLK
EP 2.8V 26
D 2.5V
38 INIT CHARGE ON OUT3 59 22 24
BLOCK (PS-CX5500) 37 FAST CHARGE
XCS DD 49 39 39 26 LD
28 30
D 2.8V
Q3102 IN3 22 MT 4.6V

42 IB SO VTR DD ON 35 35 35 38 CTL1 19 21
I/F A 4.6V
BATT SIG 43 IB SI
RV001 VR 34 46 48
D 2.8V
ZOOM VR 3 56 VTR DD SENS
S004 11 1 VTR MODE SW L4007 L4012

Q4016 A 4.6V
MODE 10 2 CAM MODE SW XLANC PWR ON 8 51 51 IMG VH
SWITCHING L4017 58
9 7 XPHOTO STBY SW CN4901 AU 4.6V IMG VL
CN1008 60
CN1002 L4022
EP 4.6V
S007 OUT4 60
POWER CN1008
IC3103 (12/18) Q4006 49
V CONT LANC
L4013 DRV A4.6V
REG 52
28 30 I/O IN4 23
LANC DC L4002 L4028
54 D 2.5V
28 30 Q4015
CN4901 SWITCHING
L4018
DRV MT 4.6V DRV MT 4.6V
L4024 MT 4.6V DRV A 4.6V
OUT5 61
FP-608 2.8V
Q4039
2.5V REG
L4009
WG1 D 2.5V WG1 D 2.5V
FLEXIBLE IN5 24 L4019

WG1 A 2.5V WG1 A 2.5V
J9001
CN4904
LANC DC 1 L4027
A 2.5V A 2.5V
2
10 L4003 TO
LANC Q4017 POWER
SWITCHING (7/7) D 2.5V
BLOCK
2.5V REG
VSOFT A 2.8V DIAGRAM(3/3)
3 1
OUT6 62
IC4003 D 1.5V (PAGE 3-13)
3.1V REG D 2.8V
IN6 25 7
Q4038
D 3.1V D 3.1V
Q4037,4007 3.1 V REG
L4001 L4008 IMG VH
Q4026
OUT7 63 EP 13.5V
13.5 V REG
Q4019
SWITCHING
IN7 2
IMG VL
D4006
RECT
Q4901,4902 VTR DD ON
FP-609 PLUNGER PLG VCC
FLEXIBLE DRIVE
D9051 CN4907
D 2.8V
LED 6
3-9 3-10
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
CK-127
BOARD PD-188 BOARD
(2/2)
VC-307 BOARD LB-084 BOARD CN1007 CN5201 Q6003,6004 CN6001
LCD901
FB6002 2.5INCH
(2/2) INTELLIGENT EP 13.5V
22 18 3 3 18 COLOR
LCD
ACCESSORY EP 2.8V
CN2201 CN5601 CN5602
LCD902 EP 4.6V
19 21 6 6
UNIT
L2203
SHOE EP 13.5V
1 20
VDD
1
COLOR
LCD
UNIT
EP 2.8V
18 22 7 7
CN1008 CN1001 (1/2) (1/2)

SHOE UNREG SHOE UNREG (10/18) (10/18)
11 13 1 2 1
IC6001 IC6002
EP 4.6V
4 2
IC2201 IC2202 RGB TIMING
POFF
DRIVE GENERATOR 14
EP 13.5V
17 RGB
DRIVE
TIMING
GENERATOR
8 16 5 IC5601
EP 2.8V
40 ND901
BACK
BL REG
16 18 LIGHT (2/2) BACKLIGHT
DRIVE
BL CONT 20
IC6101,6102
EP 4.6V
20 1 INVERTER BL HIGH
D 2.8V 10
19 2 BL CONT BACK LIGHT
23 17 5 5 DRIVE CN6101
BL REG
21 20 19 20 4 4
CN5202 CN6201
(15/18) (15/18) (16/18)

(11/18)
IC2301 IC2302 IC2401
AUDIO AUDIO MIC
IC3001 55
ZM RST LED
I/O D/A CONV. AMP (11/18) 57

FC RST LED
CAMERA
Q2307 A/D CONV.
MT 4.6V
REG
SP VCC
IC3004 CONTROL
AU 4.6V AU 4.6V EEPROM

44
AU 2.8V 38 AU 2.8V
D 2.8V
D 1.5V (13/18) (13/18) (13/18) (14/18)
TO CAM DD ON
189
IC3203 IC3302 IC3202 IC3401
1 POWER BLOCK
DIAGRAM HI 32Mbit
(1/3)(MD-097) EEPROM XTAL FLASH
CONTROL
OSC MEMORY
(PAGE 3-10) (7/18) (4/18) (6/18) (5/18)
DIGITAL
(5/18) (4/18) STILL
CONTROL
IC3801 IC3501 IC3701 IC3601 IC3603 IC3502
A 1.5V
IC3803 DVD
SYSTEM
DVD
CODEC
IC3602 16Mbit
FCRAM
AUDIO
PLL
D 1.5V
FB3202
CONTROL
64Mbit 128Mbit D2.8V
SDRAM SDRAM
D 3.1V 1.5V
3
(2/18) (2/18)
A 2.8V 32 34 (2/18)
36
A 2.8V A 2.8V
IC1401 IC1403
A 1.5V
50
A 1.5V
CAMERA 16Mbit IC1402
PROCESS SDRAM
D 1.5V 52 54 D 1.5V D 1.5V
1.5V
56
D 3.1V REG
D 3.1V
26
D 2.5V 2
D 2.5V L1403
22 24 D 2.8V D 2.8V
CN1006 CN5503
D 2.8V
28 30
AU 2.8V
7 16 LED
IC5501
A 4.6V
MT 4.6V MT 4.9V 17 6 REMOTE
19 21
D5503 COMMANDER
A 4.6V R1005,1006 RECEIVER
46 48 MT 4.9V NS LED A NIGHT SHOT
5 18
LED
SE5501,5502
L1101 SE 2.8V SE 2.8V PITCH/YAW
12 11
SENSOR
A 2.8V (1/18) MA-420 BOARD

D 2.8V CAM DD ON
42 IC1301
A 4.6V
L1201
A 4.6V
TIMING
GENERATOR CD-428 BOARD
IMG VH Q1301,1302,1305 CN1301 CN5001
58
IMG VL IMG VH 12V CAM 12V
60
(16/18) (9/18) (8/18) (3/18) (3/18)
REG
2 26
IC5001
CN1003
IC1101 IC2001 IC2101 IC1203 IC1201 (1/18) (1/18)
IMG VL -6.5V
REG
CAM -6.5V
1 27
CCD
IMAGER
D 3.1V
FOR 9
ADJUSTMENTS PITCH/
YAW
VIDEO
A/D CONV.
VIDEO
IN/OUT
FOCUS/Z OOM/
IRIS/ND
IC1202 IC1302 IC1303 A 2.8V
Q1303,1304
SENSOR AGC DRIVE

AMP ACC IRIS DRIVE SH,AGC FREQ
CN1004
D 3.1V A/D CONV. TUNE
FOR 3 ZM RST LED
AMP
ADJUSTMENTS
Q1202(1/2)
A 2.8V CN ZM SENS VCC ZOOM
17 RESET
SENSOR
FC RST LED
LENS ASSY
FC SENS VCC FOCUS
9 RESET
Q1202(2/2) CN1201 SENSOR
3-11 3-12
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
BASE UNIT
MD-097 BOARD (2/2)
(4/7) (4/7) (4/7)
IC4703 IC4702 IC4701

IC4704 FLASH
MEMORY
DVD
DRIVE 87
XSKEW ON
CONTOROL XSKEW RW XSKEW RW CN4501

ADDRESS 137
LATCH INSW X INSW X LDD VCC 8
84 9
LD DRIVE
(1/7)
PD VCC
FB4702 31 PD IC
D 2.8V A 2.8V IC4504
A 2.5V
D 2.5V TILT PD AMP
FDPD VCC
D 3.1V 39 FPD IC
D 1.5V
FB4603
TILT LEDA
20
Q4504 TILT PD
A 2.8V TILT PDK
(4/7) (2/7) (2/7) (2/7) (1/7) 19
Q4502
TO CN4802
2 POWER BLOCK
DIAGRAM
IC4202 IC4601 IC4603 IC4602 IC4502 IN SW
2
IN LIMIT
PD
(1/3) USB 2.0 DVD 64Mbit DVD Q4801
(PAGE 3-10) BRIDGE DSP SDRAM RF
PROCESS A 2.8V
IC4606 DRV MT 4.6V
12
6 SPINDLE
MOTOR
SELECTOR
WG1 A 2.5V
WG1 D 2.5V
CN5751
D 2.8V CN4803
L4801 14
A 2.8V A 2.8V A 2.8V SS VCC
1
DRV A 4.6V DRV A 4.6V DRV A 4.6V 15
DRV MT 4.6V DRV MT 4.6V DRV MT 4.6V
IC5751
CN4909 IC5752
(3/7) (3/7) (3/7) (3/7) (3/7) (3/7) (3/7) (1/7) 2
M SHOCK
SENSOR
IC4811 IC4802 IC4801 IC4803 IC4804 IC4812 IC4813 IC4501 DC FAN AMP
BUFFER
AMP
FOCUS DRIVE
TRACKING DRIVE
SPINDLE
MOTOR
BUFFER IC4805 MMV OR GATE ROPC
REF
SLED MOTOR DRIVE DRIVE
SKEW MOTOR SS-174 BOARD
DRIVE
3-13 3-14E
F
E
C
B
A
G
D
COVER
16
CN5751 15P
CN4001 6P
1
15 A_2.8V
6 BATT_UNREG
14 A_2.8V
5 BATT_SIG
13 SHOCKA_T
4 ACV_UNREG
12 SHOCKA_T
DC-IN
3 ACV_GND
11 SHOCKA_F
BT-901
2 BATT_XEXT
BATTERY
10 SHOCKA_F
TERMINAL
1 BATT_GND
CN4803 15P 9 REG_GND
A_2.8V 1 8 REG_GND
SHOCKA_T 2 7 REG_GND
2
SHOCKA_F 3 6 XSHK_T
CN4904 10P
REG_GND 4 5 XSHK_T
10 LANC_DC
XSHK_T 5 4 XSHK_F
SS-174T BOARD
9 REG_GND
XSHK_F 6 3 XSHK_F
8 XLANC_JACK_IN
REG_GND 7 2 REG_GND
7 LANC_SIG
VO3(-) (SKW1-) 8 1 REG_GND
6 USB_D-
VO3(-) (SKW1-) 9
USB
5 USB_GND
LANC
VO4(-) (SKW2-) 10
3
FP-608
4 USB_D+
FLEXIBLE
VO4(-) (SKW2-) 11
3 USB_VCC
VO3(+) (SKW1+) 12
2 REG_GND
VO3(+) (SKW1+) 13
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/3)
1 REG_GND
VO4(+) (SKW2+) 14
VO4(+) (SKW2+) 15
4-1
4
CN4902 20P
SECTION 4
20 VTR_CAM_DD_ON REG_GND 19
18 TEST_RFON TEST_TE0 17 CN4802 20P

SKEW MOTOR
16 JIG_UNREG P97 15 INLIMIT_X (PD-C) 1
14 TEST_RFOP HI_EVER_SCK 13 INSW (PD-A) 2

12 TEST_FE0 HI_EVER_SO 11 REG_GND 3
CPC
10 XHELIO_RESET XCS_DD 9 REG_GND 4
(FOR CHECK)
8 TXD0 REG_GND 7 NC 5
5
6 RXD0 PLCK 5 A_2.8V 6

4 TXD3 Vrd 3 A3 (W) 7
2 DSU/RXD3 MON9 1 A2 (V) 8
A1 (U) 9
H1+ (HU+) 10
H1- (HU-) 11
DRV_MT_4.6V (H+) 12
CN4907 8P VH (H-) 13
6
8 EJECT_LED H2+ (HV+) 14

SPINDLE MOTOR
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
7 ACCS_LED H2- (HV-) 15

6 D_2.8V H3+ (HW+) 16
5 LID_OPEN H3- (HW-) 17

EJECT
4 REG_GND REG_GND 18
FP-609
3 EJECT_SW TEMP 19
FLEXIBLE
PLUNGER
2 PLG_VCC NC 20
1 REG_GND
7
CN4501 40P
F+ 1
CN4908 2P T- 2
1 DEW_AD T+ 3
DEW
2 REG_GND F- 4
F-GND 5
8
SENSOR
LDD-LDEN1 6
LDD-XOUTEN3 7
CN4909 2P LDD-VCC 8
2 DRV_MT_4.6V LDD-VCC 9
DC
FAN
1 A LDD-GND 10
MD-097 BOARD(1/2)
LDD-GND 11
and not for the single MD-097 board.
MOTOR
MECHANISM DECK
LDD-OSCEN 12
LDD-IIN3 13
9
LDD-IIN2 14
LDD-IIN1 15
LDD-XOUTEN2 16
MOD-C 17
TILT-LEDK 18
TILT-PDK 19
TILT-LEDA 20
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
TILT-PD2 21
10
TILT-PD1 22
RF BLOCK
G (PD-F) 23
D (PD-B) 24
C (PD-A) 25
Because the necessary adjustment or writing of data cannot be made locally.
Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY(A-7111-651-A)
E (PD-H) 26
F (PD-G) 27
B (PD-D) 28
Replacement of IC4201,4502,4601 and IC4702 on the MD-097 board is not possible.
A (PD-C) 29
11
H (PD-E) 30
PD-VCC 31
PD-VC 32
PD-GND 33
4-2
PD-RF- 34
PD-RF+ 35
PD-MODE 36
FPD-GND 37
12
FPDIC-VC 38
FPD-VCC 39
FPDIC-OUT 40
CN4801 6P
13
GND 1
GND 2
VO4- (FMO2) 3
VO3+ (FMOS1) 4
VO4+ (FMO1) 5
VO3- (FMOS2) 6
SLED MOTOR
14
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/3)

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
J
F
L
E
K
C
B
A
H
G
D
M
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
16

MIC901
1
AUDIO/VIDEO
MIC UNIT
FP-611
FLEXIBLE
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
GND
GND
2
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
VIDEO_I/O
INT_MIC_L
INT_MIC_R
CN1501 27P
AV_JACK_IN
AUDIO_L_I/O
AUDIO_R_I/O
27 FOCUS-_P
G
Y
CN1009
CN5501
26 FOCUS+_P
J5501
25 ZOOM-_P
8P
C
4P
24 ZOOM+_P
G
4-3
23 F_MR/TEMP_GND
22 TEMP_P
S VIDEO
21 F_MR_VCC
3
CN1006 22P CN5503 22P

20 F_MR_A_P
INT_MIC_R 1 22 INT_MIC_R
19 F_MR_B_P
MIC_GND 2 21 MIC_GND
18 NS_GND
INT_MIC_L 3 20 INT_MIC_L
17 NT_SHOT_P
16 ND_HALL+_P
NS_LED_A 5 18 NS_LED_A
15 ND_BIAS-_P
NS_LED_K 6 17 NS_LED_K
14 ND_DRIVE+_P
AU_2.8V 7 16 AU_2.8V
LENS
13 ND_DRIVE-_P
4
F_TALLY_LED 8 15 F_TALLY_LED
12 ND_HALL-_P
REG_GND 9 14 REG_GND
11 ND_BIAS+_P
FP-605
PS_V 10 13 PS_V
10 Z_MR_B_P
PS_LI 11 12 PS_LI
9 Z_MR_GND
SE_2.8V 12 11 SE_2.8V
8 Z_MR_A_P
MA-420 BOARD
YS_V 13 10 YS_V
7 Z_MR_VCC
YS_LI 14 9 YS_LI
6 I_HALL+_P
REG_GND 15 8 REG_GND
5 I_BIAS-_P
5
SIRCS_SIG 16 7 SIRCS_SIG
FLEXIBLE
4 I_DRIVE+_P
A_4.6V 17 6 A_4.6V
3 I_DRIVE-_P
XS_JACK_IN 18 5 XS_JACK_IN
2 I_HALL-_P
S_REG_GND 19 4 S_REG_GND
1 I_BIAS+_P
S_Y_I/O 20 3 S_Y_I/O
S_REG_GND 21 2 S_REG_GND
S_C_I/O 22 1 S_C_I/O
6
CN5201 39P CN1007 39P

CN5206 6P
EXT_MIC_L 1 39 EXT_MIC_L
6 PANEL_REV
EXT_MIC_R 2 38 EXT_MIC_R
5 PANEL_REV
4 N.C.
3 N.C.
FP-612
HI_XRESET 5 35 HI_XRESET CN1010 2P CN5102 2P
FLEXIBLE
2 GND
KEY_AD1 6 34 KEY_AD1 REG_GND 1 2 REG_GND
CCD
1 GND
KEY_AD2 7 33 KEY_AD2 REG_GND 2 1 REG_GND
7
IMAGER
PANEL REVERSE
KEY_AD3 8 32 KEY_AD3
XBATT_VIEW 11 29 XBATT_VIEW
HARNESS
DIAL_A 12 28 DIAL_A
DIAL_B 13 27 DIAL_B
BATT_LI_3V 14 26 BATT_LI_3V CN5101 27P

BL_GND 15 25 BL_GND CN1601 24P 1 SHD
8
BL_GND 16 24 BL_GND SHD 24 2 SHP

BL_CONT 17 23 BL_CONT SHP 23 3 GND
EP_13.5V 18 22 EP_13.5V GND 22 4 GND
FP-602
BL_REG 19 21 BL_REG RG 21 5 RG
BL_REG 20 20 BL_REG GND 20 6 GND

CN5205 6P
EP_4.6V 21 19 EP_4.6V H1 19 7 H1
1 DIAL_A
VC-307 BOARD(2/2)
EP_2.8V 22 18 EP_2.8V H2 18 8 N.C.

2 REG_GND
PANEL_B 23 17 PANEL_B GND 17 9 H2
9
3 DIAL_B
REG_GND 24 16 REG_GND GND 16 10 GND
(KP-CX5500)
4 REG_GND
FLEXIBLE
PANEL_G 25 15 PANEL_G CCD_OUT- 15 11 GND

5 FOCUS
CK-127 BOARD
PANEL_R 26 14 PANEL_R CCD_OUT+ 14 12 CCD_OUT-

FP-606
6 EXPOSURE
REG_GND 27 13 REG_GND GND 13 13 CCD_OUT+
VG 28 12 VG GND 12 14 GND
CD-428 BOARD
PSIG 29 11 PSIG A_2.8V 11 15 GND
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

XRST_VTR 30 10 XRST_VTR VSUB 10 16 A_2.8V
VD_SCK 31 9 VD_SCK CSUB 9 17 VSUB
10
XCS_LCD 32 8 XCS_LCD CLPDM 8 18 CSUB

FLEXIBLE
VD_SO 33 7 VD_SO V1 7 19 CLPDM

PANEL_XVD 34 6 PANEL_XVD V4 6 20 V1
CN5203 2P PANEL_XHD 35 5 PANEL_XHD V2 5 21 V4
1 SP(+) XHD_OUT 36 4 XHD_OUT V3 4 22 V2
SP901
2 SP(-) REG_GND 37 3 REG_GND GND 3 23 V3
SPEAKER
SP+ 38 2 SP+ CAM_15V 2 24 GND
SP- 39 1 SP- CAM_-7.5V 1 25 GND
11
26 CAM_15V
27 CAM_-7.5V
CN5202
CN5204 6P
20P
PANEL_XHD
PANEL_XVD
PANEL_R
PANEL_G
PANEL_B
MIC_GND
EXT_MIC_L
EXT_MIC_R
REG_GND
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD1
XHD_OUT
VD_SO
XCS_LCD
VD_SCK
XRST_VTR
PSIG
VG
REG_GND
EP_2.8V
EP_4.75V
BL_CONT
BL_REG
EP_13.3V
SE_GND
BL_GND
12
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
FP-607 PV-018 HARNESS

FLEXIBLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
VG
4-4
PSIG
VD_SO
BL_REG
VD_SCK
EP_2.8V
SE_GND
BL_GND
PANEL_B
13
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD1
PANEL_R
PANEL_G
XCS_LCD
BL_CONT
EP_4.75V
EP_13.3V
MIC_GND
XHD_OUT
REG_GND
REG_GND
XRST_VTR
EXT_MIC_L
EXT_MIC_R
PANEL_XVD
PANEL_XHD
TO
(1/2)
CN6201
CN5301
VC-307 BOARD
6P
20P
BOARD
PD-188
14
CN6001
FB-220 BOARD
CN6101
CN5302 6P
24P
10P
CRext
TEST1
TEST2
PSIG
REF
VST
WIDE
HCK2
HCK1
KEY_AD1_A
REG_GND
MIC_GND
EXT_MIC_R
EXT_MIC_L
MIC_GND
BL_HIGH
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
BL_LOW
LED
LED_GND
VCK
VSS
VVSSG
HST
EN
CS
SOUT
B
RGT
VDD
G
R
VDOG
COM
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
10
24
23
22
21
20
DWN 19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
FP-610
FLEXIBLE
16
ND901
LCD901
2.5INCH
SUPER NS/
EXT_MIC
BACK LIGHT
COLOR SLOW S
COLOR LCD UNIT
17
I
J
F
E
K
C
B
A
H
G
D
16
TO
COVER
(2/2)
1
VC-307 BOARD
FLASH JIG
(FOR ADJUSTMENT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MD2
XINIT
D_3.1V
USB_D-
USB_D+
2
AVCC_LK
REG_GND
REG_GND
USB_DET11
REC_CRRT1
REC_CRRT0
USB_VCC_ON
MC_FLASH_SI
MC_FLASH_SO
XCS_MC_FLASH
MC_FLASH_SCK
CN1004
16P
3
CN1008 100P CN4901 100P
1 REG_GND REG_GND 2 1 REG_GND REG_GND 2

CN1003 20P
1 GND
2 GND
4
11 SHOE_UNREG REG_GND 12 11 SHOE_UNREG REG_GND 12

3 PANEL_VG
13 SHOE_UNREG SHOE_ON 14 13 SHOE_UNREG SHOE_ON 14
4 H_START
15 BATT_LI_3V BL_REG 16 15 BATT_LI_3V BL_REG 16
5 XHD/PSIG
17 EP_13.5V BL_REG 18 17 EP_13.5V BL_REG 18
6 EVF_VG
19 MT_4.6V BL_CONT 20 19 MT_4.6V BL_CONT 20
4-5
7 EVF_VCO
21 MT_4.6V D_2.5V 22 21 MT_4.6V D_2.5V 22
8 EVF_BL
23 VTR_UNREG D_2.5V 24 23 VTR_UNREG D_2.5V 24
9 D_3.1V
25 BATT_UNREG D_3.1V 26 25 BATT_UNREG D_3.1V 26
10 LANC_SIG
5
27 BATT/XEXT_SW D_2.8V 28 27 BATT/XEXT_SW D_2.8V 28
CPC
11 MS_XIN
(FOR CHECK)
29 BATT_SIG D_2.8V 30 29 BATT_SIG D_2.8V 30
12 MS_DIO
31 FAST_CHARGE A_2.8V 32 31 FAST_CHARGE A_2.8V 32
13 MS_BS
33 INIT_CHARGE_ON A_2.8V 34 33 INIT_CHARGE_ON A_2.8V 34
14 MS_VCC_ON
35 VTR_DD_ON A_2.8V 36 35 VTR_DD_ON A_2.8V 36
15 MS_SCLK
37 VC_IN AU_2.8V 38 37 VC_IN AU_2.8V 38
16 ACCESS_LED
39 XCS_DD EP_2.8V 40 39 XCS_DD EP_2.8V 40
17 C_PIO5
41 HI_EVER_SO EP_4.6V 42 41 HI_EVER_SO EP_4.6V 42
18 C_PIO4
6
43 HI_EVER_SCK AU_4.6V 44 43 HI_EVER_SCK AU_4.6V 44

19 S_TXD
45 BATT_IN A_4.6V 46 45 BATT_IN A_4.6V 46
20 S_RXD
47 HI_XRESET A_4.6V 48 47 HI_XRESET A_4.6V 48
49 XLANC_ON A_1.5V 50 49 XLANC_ON A_1.5V 50
51 XLANC_PWR_ON D_1.5V 52 51 XLANC_PWR_ON D_1.5V 52
53 LANC_IN D_1.5V 54 53 LANC_IN D_1.5V 54

Board TO Board
55 LANC_OUT D_1.5V 56 55 LANC_OUT D_1.5V 56
57 LANC_SIG IMG_VH 58 57 LANC_SIG IMG_VH 58

MD-097 BOARD(2/2)
VC-307 BOARD(1/2)
7
CN1001 10P 59 LANC_DC IMG_VL 60 59 LANC_DC IMG_VL 60
1 SHOE_UNREG 61 XATA_RESET EJECT_RQ 62 61 XATA_RESET EJECT_RQ 62
2 SHOE_UNREG 63 USB_XSTBY SCK_TO_HELIO 64 63 USB_XSTBY SCK_TO_HELIO 64
3 LANC_SIG 65 USB_DET20 XUSB_SEL 66 65 USB_DET20 XUSB_SEL 66

Because the necessary adjustment or writing of data cannot be made locally.
4 SHOE_ID1 67 EJECT_SW EJECT_OK 68 67 EJECT_SW EJECT_OK 68
5 SHOE_ID2 69 XRST_BRIDGE USB_STATUS 70 69 XRST_BRIDGE USB_STATUS 70

6 EXT_STROBO 71 VOUT XHELIO_RESET 72 71 VOUT XHELIO_RESET 72

Replacement of IC4201,4502,4601 and IC4702 on the MD-097 board is not possible.
FP-604
7 SHOE_MIC_GND 73 HD4 EVER_3.0V 74 73 HD4 EVER_3.0V 74
FLEXIBLE
INTELLIGENT
8
8 SHOE_MIC_L 75 HD3 HD5 76 75 HD3 HD5 76
9 SHOE_UNREG_GND 77 HD2 HD6 78 77 HD2 HD6 78
ACCESSORY SHOE
10 SHOE_UNREG_GND 79 HD1 HD7 80 79 HD1 HD7 80
81 HD0 HD8 82 81 HD0 HD8 82

83 HDRQ HD9 84 83 HDRQ HD9 84
85 HWR_X HD10 86 85 HWR_X HD10 86
87 HRD_X HD11 88 87 HRD_X HD11 88
CN1002 14P 89 IORDY HD12 90 89 IORDY HD12 90

9
14 REG_GND 91 HDAK_X HD13 92 91 HDAK_X HD13 92
13 KEY_AD0 93 INTRQ HD14 94 93 INTRQ HD14 94
12 XPHOTO_FREEZE 95 HA1 HD15 96 95 HA1 HD15 96
11 XVTR_ON_SW 97 HA0 HA2 98 97 HA0 HA2 98
10 XCAM_ON_SW 99 HCS1_X HCS3_X 100 99 HCS1_X HCS3_X 100
9 XRHOTO_STBY_SW
8 VTR_UNREG
7 CHARGE_LED_ON
(PS-CX5500)
6 POWER_LED
10
5 POWER_VCC
4 XS/S_SW
3 D_2.8V
2 ZOOM_AD

1 REG_GND
CN2201
20P
11
XTALLY_LED
EVF_VDD
EVF_GND
VST
VCK
STB
EN
HST
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
VB
VR
VG
COM
EVF_GND
LED_ON/OFF
LED_DA
D_2.8V
EP_4.6V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
FP-603
FLEXIBLE
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
12
EN
VB
VR
VG
VST
STB
BLK
VCK
HST
COM
HCK2
HCK1
CN5602 16P
D_2.8V
LED_DA
EVF_VCC
EVF_4.6V
EVF_GND
EVF_GND
16 COM
LED_ON/OFF
XTALLY_LED
15 VG
CN5601
14 VR
13 VB
20P
12 BLK
11 HCK1
13
10 HCK2
9 HST
LCD902
8 RGT
4-6
7 DWN
6 EN
COLOR EVF UNIT
5 STB
LB-084
4 VCK
BOARD
3 VST
14
2 VSS
1 VDD
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
Link
CD-428 BOARD (CCD IMAGER) CK-127 BOARD (CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH)
FP-609 FLEXIBLE FB-220 BOARD (FUNCTION SWITCH)
PD-188 BOARD (1/2) (LCD DRIVE) FP-610 FLEXIBLE (EXT MIC)
PD-188 BOARD (2/2) (BACKLIGHT DRIVE) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (KP-CX5500)
LB-084 BOARD
(EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500)
FP-608 FLEXIBLE (USB, LANC) FP-611 FLEXIBLE (AUDIO/VIDEO JACK)
MA-420 BOARD
(PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SEONSOR, MIC)
COMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS WAVEFORMS

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For schematic diagrams) 1. Connection

All capacitors are in F unless otherwise noted. pF : Pattern box
Link
F. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics
and tantalums.
Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted.
k=1000 , M=1000 k.
Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip. 1.5 m
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum
capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.
Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C541 L452
22U 10UH
TA A 2520
Kinds of capacitor Front of the lens

Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)
Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX

indicate that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of
Parts with * differ according to the model/destination. Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain.
Refer to the mount table for each function. H
All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
curve B, unless otherwise noted.
Red
Signal name
Blue
XEDIT EDIT PB/XREC PB/REC
2: non flammable resistor
5: fusible resistor
C: panel designation
A: B+ Line
B: B Line A B A=B B A
J : IN/OUT direction of (+,) B LINE. Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
C: adjustment for repair.
A: VIDEO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
A: AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
A: VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL
A: VIDEO/AUDIO/SERVO SIGNAL
A: SERVO SIGNAL
Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
(Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)
Voltages and waveforms are measured between the
Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)
measurement points and ground when camera shoots
color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values
and reference waveforms. When indicating parts by reference number, please
(VOM of DC 10 M input impedance is used) include the board name.
Voltage values change depending upon input
impedance of VOM used.) Note : Note :
The components identified by Les composants identifis par
mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
0 are critical for safety. pour la scurit.
Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
specified. pice portant le numro spcifi.
4-9
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CD-428 BOARD FP-609 FLEXIBLE BOARD
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS For Schematic Diagram

Refer to page 4-83 for printed wiring board of CD-428 board.
Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board of FP-609 board.
Refer to page 4-105 for waveforms of CD-428 board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
CN5001 27P
CD-428 BOARD SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL
1 GND
FP-609 FLEXIBLE
A CCD IMAGER 2 GND
A
3 GND RY9501
XX MARK:NO MOUNT CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA 4
PLANGER
GND
RG REG_GND 1
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE REC 5 RG
PLG_VCC 2
R :REC MODE 6 GND TO S9053
PB H1 EJECT_SW 3
P :PB MODE MD-097 BOARD OPEN
7 H1 (6/7) REG_GND 4
CN4907 S9052 , S9051
8 NC
H2 LID_OPEN 5 (LID OPEN)
9 H2 (PAGE 4-38 D_2.8V 6
10 GND of LEVEL3)
B 11 GND
TO
VC-307 BOARD
B ACCS_LED 7 R9052
390
EJECT_LED 8
12 GND (1/18) R9051
CN1301 100
13 CCD_OUT
14 GND (THROUGH THE
FP-606 FLEXIBLE ) D9051
CL-165HR/YG-D-T
15 GND (ACCESS/OPEN)
(PAGE 4-41
R-6.4
R-6.4
R-0.3
R-0.3
ICX221BK-13 (DVD100E)
R9.1
ICX220BK-13 (DVD100)
R12.0 of LEVEL3)
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
16 GND
P0 L5001
220uH 17 VSHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
18 V_DRAIN
C C5003 C5004
C
V4
V3
V2
V1
V_HOLD
V_DRAIN
VDD
IC5001 0.01u
B
10u
20V
TA B
19
20
GND
V1
CCD IMAGER 1 2 2SC4178-F13F14-T1
21 V4
16
3 22 V2
IC5001
23 V3
5 4
Q5001
BUFFER
CCD_OUT
24 GND
GND
SUB
RG
H2
H1
VL
* 25 GND
*Pin number and index mark R12.0
P0 26 CAM_12V
D of IC5001 are shown as 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 CAM_-6.5V
R-6.8
P0.4
viewed from the bottom.

R8.6
P0
R1.4
P0
R1.7
P0
R10.3
P0
R8.5
P0
C5005 C5002 R7.7

0.01u P0
10p R5001
B CH R5002 LN5001
8200 XX
C5001
22u GND
10V RG
TA A
C5006 R5003 FB5002
L5002 0.01u 0uH
10uH XX
B
E H1
TO
H2 CN5002 2P VC-307 BOARD
2 REG_GND (17/18)
CN1010
1 REG_GND
(PAGE 4-74
of LEVEL3)
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager
F The CD-428 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped

with a CCD imager.
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the
16
old one and mount it onto the new one.
If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the
adjustments for the camera section.
As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from
its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts
nor exposed to strong light.
4-11 4-12 CD-428/FP-609

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS PD-188 PRINTED WIRING BOARD
For Schematic Diagram

Refer to page 4-85 for printed wiring board.
Refer to page 4-106 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
PD-188 BOARD(1/2)
A LCD DRIVE(RGB/TG BLOCK) NO MARK:REC/PB MODE FB6002 0uH
C6009 C6010
XX MARK:NO MOUNT 1u 0.01u
BGP
BLK
PRG
FRP
PFRP
CN6201 25V B
20P
VG
BL_GND TA
VR
BL_GND 1
VB
SE_GND
VP
C6006 R6005 VP
SE_GND 2
XX XX
EP_13.3V 3
BL_REG
BL_REG 4 C6014
BL_CONT
13.5
1u
1.9
2.7
2.8
1.4
1.4
2.8
7.0
3.3
BL_CONT 5
B
0
EP_4.75V B
EP_4.75V 6
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
EP_2.8V 7
TO
N.C.
EXT_DA
N.C
BGP
BLACK_IN
PRG
FRP
PFRP
VP
P_DC_DET
Vcc2
XVP.SAVE
CK-127 BOARD REG_GND 8 Q6004
CN5202 PANEL_B 2SA207800LS0
PANEL_B 9 SWITCH
PANEL_G 13.5 13.4
THROUGH THE
( PV-018 HARNESS ) PANEL_G
PANEL_R
10
11
PANEL_R
0
3 7.0
VB
C6021
37
24
R6017
(PAGE 4-21) VG
VG N.C. VB
47k XX
12 C6016 1u B 12.7 B
PSIG XC.SAVE 2.8 2.9
38
23
PSIG 13 XC.SAVE B_DC_DET
C XRST_VTR 14
XRST_VTR
VD_SCK1 2.7 7.0
VG R6018
2
39
22
VD_SCK XSCK VG 12k
VD_SCK 15 RB6001 D6002
XCS_LCD XTG_SO 2.6 3.1 C6017 1u B 100X4 XX
40
21
XCS_LCD 16 SI G_DC_DET
VD_SO VR
R6002
VD_SO 17
470k
XCS_LCD 2.8
IC6001 1 7.0
R6016
0.1
41
20
PANEL_XVD L6001 XCS VR
PANEL_XVD 18 1k 2.7
10uH C6018 1u B TG14
PANEL_XHD 2.8 RGB DRIVE 2.9
42
19
PANEL_XHD 19 Vcc1 R_DC_DET
XHD_OUT IC6001 C6020
XHD_OUT 20 2.8 CXA3289BR-T4 XX Q6003
43
18
TRAP_ADJ GND2 UNR32A300LS0
C6001 C6002 SWITCH
D 4.7u 10u 1.2
44
17
B 6.3V LPF_ADJ GND1
A R6001 RB6002 XX
68k XP.SAVE 2.8 C6019
45
16
XP.SAVE VREF
REG_GND
BL_GND PANEL_B 1.7
4 13.5
4.7u
B
46
15
BL_GND B_IN Vcc3
SE_GND C6003 0.01u
SE_GND PANEL_G 1.7
5
47
14
BL_REG G_IN COM_OUT
BL_REG C6004 0.01u
EP_4.75V PANEL_R 1.7
48
13
EP_4.75V R_IN COM_IN C6024
BL_CONT
BL_CONT
C6005 0.01u
6 R6021 0.1u
B
E 150k
XSH.SAVE
CN6001 24P
COM_DC
LCD901
OP_OUT
OP_IN+
OP_IN-
SH_R
SH_G
SH_B
SH_A
BIAS
24 TEST1
GND
VCO
1 (2/2)
TG24
23 COM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 VST
TG23
21 VCK
0.9
2.8
0.9
0.9
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
2.9
6.7
TG22
2.8
20 EN
TG21
SH1
SH2
SH3
SH4
2700
R6006
C6012 19 DWN
0.1u
18 VDD
C6011
B
560p
R6013
F R6009
68k
100k D6001
1SV290(TPL3)
C6023
1u
B
17 VSS
FB6001 R6007 R6012 16 VDOG 2.5 INCH
0uH 47k 1M COLOR LCD
D6003
EP_2.8V C6013 RD3.3UM-T1B 15 VVSSG UNIT
0.001u
R6010 R6011 B 14 CS
22k 68k C6015 TG20
L6002
6.8uH 68p 13 WIDE
TG18
12 HST
VG
11 REF
10 SOUT
G 9 CRext
XC.SAVE
XP.SAVE
TG17
8 HCK2
XRST_VTR TG16
SH1
SH2
SH3
SH4
7 HCK1
R6003
1k 6 PSIG
2.8
0.9
2.8
0.9
0.9
2.8
1.4
2.8
1.4
1.4
2.8
5 G
C6007
0.1u 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 4 R
3 B
XCLR
SHR
SHG
SHB
SHA
VSS
TEST
RPD
OSCI
OSCO
XSTBY
XC.SAVE
TG15
Q6002 2 RGT
H HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)
1 TEST2
R6022
R6015 820k
BGP 2.7 8 0 TG24 10k 13.4
R6019
1M 1.6
37
24
XCLP VST 7.6 1.0
4 6
PRG 2.8 1.4 TG23
38
23
PRG VCK 5 2
C6022 R6020
BLK 0 2.6 TG22 7.0 7.6 0.1u 68k
39
22
SBLK EN 3 1 B
Q6001,6002
FRP 1.4 2.8 PSIG DRIVE 7.0
TG21
40
21
FRP DWN
Q6005
I PFRP 1.4 IC6002 0.1 TG20 R6014 2SA207800LS0
41
20
PFRP WIDE 10k LEVEL SHIFT
TIMING GENERATOR 6.5
VD_SCK1 2.7 2.8 1 3
42
19
XSCK VDD
IC6002 7.0
C6008 2.8 CXD3512R-T4 0 TG18 2 5
43
18
0.01u VDD HST 6.5
B TG17 6 4
XCS_LCD 2.8 1.4
44
17
XCS HCK2 13.4 7.0
XTG_SO 2.6 1.4 TG16 Q6001 SIGNAL PATH

45
16
SO HCK1 HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)
VD_SO 2.7 2.8 TG15 VIDEO SIGNAL
J
46
15
SI RGT
2.8 TG14 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA

47
14
VDO POFF
R6004
1k
PANEL_XVD 2.7 REC
9
48
13
XVD TSTEN
PB
7
BL_ON
XHD_OUT
DETIN
XWRT
PWM
TST0
TEST
TEST
TEST
HDO
GND
LED
HD
PANEL_XHD
K PANEL_XVD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
VD_SO
VD_SCK R6023 0 VD_SCK1 PANEL_XHD
XCS_LCD XHD_OUT
DAC
BL_ON
R6008 LED
2 (2/2)
47k
L PSIG
DETIN
16
PD-188 (1/2) 4-13 4-14

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS PD-188 PRINTED WIRING BOARD

Refer to page 4-106 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PD-188 BOARD(2/2)
BACKLIGHT DRIVE(BL BLOCK) NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
A
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
L6101
82uH
BL_REG
R6106 T6101
1800 INVERTER
1/10W TRANSFORMER
5
BL_GND
B 1
2 6
C6103
0.015u C6105
B 3
12p CN6101 10P
4.2 3.15kV
4.2 4 10 10 BL_HIGH
5 4
9 N.C
1 3
8 N.C
-0.4
-0.4
C C6101
2 Q6102
CPH5504-TL-E
Q6103
XX
7 N.C
ND901
BACKLIGHT
4.7u 6 N.C
BACK LIGHT
B DRIVE 5 N.C
4 N.C
EP_4.75V
Q6104 R6109 3 BL_LOW
100
IC6102 RN4983FE
SWITCH
4.6
-0.6
2 LED
1 (1/2) CURRENT DET

6 3
1 LED_GND
EP_2.8V
IC6102 0 2 5 D6104
R6104
D TA75S393F-TE85R 180k
4.6
PG1111R-TR
(STARTER)
2.8 VCC 0.4
5
1 4
4.7 D6103
2
2.8 1.9 MA111-(K8).S0

4
R6101 C6104
XX (SB T8711) R6105 C6102 R6108 R6110
XX 0.1u
22k 22k 470
B
LN6101
D6101 XX
CH_GND
E
R6102 DETIN
XX
SE_GND
IC6101
D6102 XX R6103
10k
1.9
TC7W53FU(TE12R)
2.8 R6107
IC1601
BL_CONT VCC 10k
1
COM SWITCH
0 1.9
CH0
2
INH DAC
F CH1
2.8 2 (1/2)
3
2.8 VEE
0
A
4
GND LED
REG_GND
Q6101
UNR32A300LS0
INV.
BL_ON
CN6202 XX
G TP_TOP 1
D6201
XX
TP_BOT 2
TP_L 3
TP_R 4
CN6203 XX
TP_R 1
H TP_L 2 The components identified by

mark 0 or dotted line with mark
Les composants identifis par
une marque 0 sont critiques
NC 3
TP_BOT 4
16 Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
TP_TOP 5 specified. pice portant le numro spcifi.
NC 6
4-15 4-16 PD-188 (2/2)

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LB-084 BOARD FP-608 FLEXIBLE BOARD

Refer to page 4-87 for printed wiring board of LB-084 board.
Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board of FP-608 board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
FP-608 FLEXIBLE
LB-084 BOARD USB,LANC
A EVF CONNECTOR,EVF BACK LIGHT A XX MARK:NO MOUNT
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
5P
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE REG_GND 1
LN9011
1 VCC
D5602 LN9010 CN9001
R5606 NSCW455T-TC9 REG_GND 2 2 D-
33k
IC5601 (BACK LIGHT)
TO USB_VCC 3
LN9009
LN9008
3 D+ (USB)
MD-097 BOARD USB_D+ 4 4 ID
BACK LIGHT DRIVE R5605
(5/7) LN9007
1800 CN4904 USB_GND 5 5 USB_GND
B R5603
IC5601
NJM2125F(TE2) B (PAGE 4-35 USB_D- 6
LN9006
180k
0.5%
of LEVEL3) LN9005
0.4 VCC 4.7 LANC_SIG 7
LN9004
5
1.1 1.4
4 6 XLANC_JACK_IN 8
D5601 LN9003
2
XX R5602 REG_GND 9 J9001
0.4 0.4 5 2 1.1 3
XX LN9002
4
Q5602 2
HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) LANC_DC 10 5
BACK LIGHT DRIVE (LANC)
R5604 3 1 1
39k 4
0.5% R9001 XX
0.4
C5601 R5607 R9003
CN5601 20P 39
0.1u
C EVF_4.6V 1
0.5%
C LND9001
CH_GND
R9002
0
0
D_2.8V 2
LED_DA 3
XTALLY_LED 4 CN5602 16P

SIGNAL PATH
LED_ON/OFF 5 16 COM VIDEO SIGNAL
EVF_GND 6 15 VG
AUDIO
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
COM 7 14 VR
TO
VG 8 13 VB REC
D VC-307 BOARD
(10/18)
CN2201
VR 9 12 BLK LCD902 D
PB
VB 10 11 HCK1 COLOR
THROUGH EVF
THE FP-603 BLK 11 10 HCK2 UNIT 16
FLEXIBLE
HCK1 12 9 HST
(PAGE 4-60 HCK2 13 8 RGT
of LEVEL3)
HST 14 7 DWN
EN 15 6 EN
STB 16 5 STB
E VCK 17 4 VCK
VST 18 3 VST
EVF_GND 19 2 VSS
EVF_VCC 20 C5602 1 VDD

2.2u
F
F SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
REC
PB
G
16
LB-084/FP-608 4-17 4-18

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MA-420 PRINTED WIRING BOARD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MA-420 BOARD
PITCH/YAW SENSOR,REMOTE SENSOR,MIC
A XX MARK:NO MOUNT
LN5501
R5505 0
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE CH_GND
VD5501 VD5502
S
R5502 0 IC5501
G
S_C_I/O
B J5501
C
R5504
XS_JACK_IN REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
S VIDEO 47
R5503 0 S_Y_I/O
Y
IC5501
4.5
4.5
D5501 SBX3055-01
UDZSTE-178.2B
S
4 3
OUT VCC
C5503
GND GND 10u
6.3V
2 1 TA CN5503 22P
C D5504
S_C_I/O
1 S_C_I/O
MA111-(K8).S0
2 S_REG_GND
S_Y_I/O
FB5501 0uH 3 S_Y_I/O
FB5504 0uH 4 S_REG_GND

XS_JACK_IN
5 XS_JACK_IN
R5501 6 A_4.6V
0
7 SIRCS_SIG
1 2 C5501 C5502
XX XX 8 REG_GND
D SE5501
Vref Vout
9 YS_LI TO
YAW SENSOR VC-307 BOARD
10 YS_V
R5507 (18/18)
GND Vcc LN5502 CN1006
0 11 SE_2.8V
3 4 CH_GND
12 PS_LI (THROUGH
FP-605 FLEXIBLE )
THE
13 PS_V
14 REG_GND (PAGE 4-75
R5506
of LEVEL3)
15 F_TALLY_LED
FB5502 0uH 680
16 AU_2.8V
E FB5503 0uH
D5507
17 NS_LED_K
SML-310LTT86 18 NS_LED_A
1 2 (RECORDING)
19 MIC_GND
Vref Vout
SE5502 20 INT_MIC_L
PITCH SENSOR
21 MIC_GND
GND Vcc R5508 D5502
0 XX 22 INT_MIC_R
3 4
SIGNAL PATH MIC901

F VIDEO SIGNAL
D5503
CL-330IRS-X-TU CN5501 4P
MIC UNIT
AUDIO
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL (rayInfrared
emitter )
1 INT_MIC_R MIC
L
2 GND
REC 3 INT_MIC_L MIC

R
4 GND
PB
G
16
4-19 4-20 MA-420

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CK-127 PRINTED WIRING BOARD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CK-127 BOARD
A CONNECTOR,FUNCTION SWITCH
CN5205 6P
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
1 DIAL_A
XX 6P 2 REG_GND
KEY_AD1 TO
KEY_AD1 1 3 DIAL_B CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
KEY_AD2 (KP-CX5500)
KEY_AD2 2 4 REG_GND
REG_GND 3 5 FOCUS
(PAGE 4-25)
EXT_MIC_R
EXT_MIC_R 4 6 EXPOSURE
EXT_MIC_L
EXT_MIC_L 5
B MIC_GND 6
MIC_GND S5208
XX
R5226
2
1
0
2
1
CN5204 6P
KEY_AD1
KEY_AD1 1 R5224
KEY_AD2 R5206 R5210 R5223 R5225
3
1200 1500 2200 3900 8200
TO KEY_AD2 2 KEY_AD3
3
FB-220 BOARD
CN5301 REG_GND 3
EXT_MIC_R B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 S5207 D5209 D5204
THROUGH THE
( FP-607 FLEXIBLE ) EXT_MIC_R 4
EXT_MIC_L
2 1 2 1 2 1
PANEL_CLOSE
01ZA8.2(TPL3) 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
(PAGE 4-23) EXT_MIC_L 5

C MIC_GND 6
MIC_GND
4 3 4 3 4 3
B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2
S5211
S5209 S5210
VISUAL SETUP REC
CN5201 39P INDEX
EXT_MIC_L
EXT_MIC_L 1
EXT_MIC_R
EXT_MIC_R 2 R5207 R5211 R5215 R5218 R5222 CN5206 6P 6P
MIC_GND KEY_AD4 1200 1500 2200 3900 8200 LD9206
MIC_GND 3 6 PANEL_REV PANEL_REV 1
D MIC_GND
HI_XRESET
4
HI_XRESET
B1
2
A1
1
B1
2
A1
1
B1
2
A1
1
B1
2
A1
1
B1
2
A1
1
5 PANEL_REV PANEL_REV 2
5 4 N.C. N.C. 3
KEY_AD1 S9201
KEY_AD1 6 3 N.C. N.C. 4 (PANEL REVERSE)
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD2 7 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 2 GND GND 5
KEY_AD3 B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2
KEY_AD3 8 S5212 S5213 S5215 S5216 1 GND GND 6
KEY_AD4 S5214 LD9201
KEY_AD4 9
KEY_AD5 (UP) (LEFT) ENTER (RIGHT) (DOWN)
KEY_AD5 10
XBATT_VIEW
XBATT_VIEW 11
FP-612 FLEXIBLE
E DIAL_A
DIAL_B
12
KEY_AD5
R5208
1200
R5212
1500
13
A1 A1 A1
BATT_LI_3V 14 B1 1 B1 1 B1 1
BL_GND 2 2 2
BL_GND 15 D5201 C5202
SE_GND XX XX
BL_GND 16
TO BL_CONT
BL_CONT 17 4 3 4 3 4 3
VC-307 BOARD EP_13.5V B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2
(17/18) EP_13.5V 18 BT5201
CN1007 BL_REG LITHIUM
C5203 S5201 S5204 S5205
BL_REG 19 D5202 XX BATTERY
THROUGH THE
F ( FP-602 FLEXIBLE ) BL_REG 20

XX (SECONDARY) EDIT VOL+ VOL-
EP_4.6V
EP_4.6V 21
(PAGE 4-73 EP_2.8V
of LEVEL3) EP_2.8V 22
PANEL_B XBATT_VIEW
PANEL_B 23
REG_GND 24
PANEL_G
PANEL_G 25 B1 A1
PANEL_R 2 1
PANEL_R 26
REG_GND 27
C5201 XX VG
4 3
G VG 28
PSIG B2
S5206
A2
PSIG 29
R5201 0 XRST_VTR DISPLAY/
XRST_VTR 30 BATT INFO
VD_SCK
VD_SCK 31
XCS_LCD
XCS_LCD 32
VD_SO HI_XRESET
VD_SO 33
PANEL_XVD R5204
PANEL_XVD 34 A1
PANEL_XHD 1k 1
2
2
1
PANEL_XHD 35 B1
XHD_OUT D5208 2
H XHD_OUT
REG_GND
36
37
UDZSTE-178.2B
3
D5205 D5207
01ZA8.2(TPL3) 01ZA8.2(TPL3) 4 3
SP+ 38 B2 A2
S5203
SP- 39
RESET LD5202
CH GND
CN5203 2P
1 SP(+) SP901
SPEAKER
CN5202 20P 2 SP(-)
BL_GND
I
1
BL_GND 1
SE_GND
SE_GND 2 D5203
EP_13.5V 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
EP_13.3V 3
3
BL_REG
BL_REG 4
BL_CONT
BL_CONT 5 LD5201
EP_4.6V
EP_4.75V 6 CH GND
EP_2.8V
EP_2.8V 7
TO
REG_GND 8
PD-188 BOARD PANEL_B
J (1/2)
CN6201
PANEL_B 9
PANEL_G
CAUTION:
THROUGH THE
PANEL_G 10
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. SIGNAL PATH
( PV-018 HARNESS ) PANEL_R 11
PANEL_R
VG VIDEO SIGNAL
(PAGE 4-13) VG 12
PSIG
Replace only with the same or equivalent type. AUDIO
PSIG 13
XRST_VTR
XRST_VTR 14
VD_SCK 15
R5227 470 VD_SCK REC
XCS_LCD 16
XCS_LCD The components identified by Les composants identifis par PB
VD_SO
K VD_SO 17
PANEL_XVD
PANEL_XVD 18
PANEL_XHD
PANEL_XHD 19 Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
16 XHD_OUT
XHD_OUT 20 specified. pice portant le numro spcifi.
CK-127 4-21 4-22

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS FB-220 BOARD FP-610 FLEXIBLE BOARD

Refer to page 4-87 for printed wiring board of FB-220 board.
Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board of FP-610 flexible board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
R5301 R5303 R5305

KEY_AD1 1200 1500 2200
FB-220 BOARD B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1
A FUNCTION SWITCH 2 1 2 1 2 1
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
4 3 4 3 4 3
B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2
S5301 S5303 S5305
BACK FADER REVIEW
LIGHT
R5302 R5304 R5306 R5308

KEY_AD2 1200 1500 2200 3900
B B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3
B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2
S5302 S5304 S5306 S5308 S5310
2
1
D5301 STOP PREV PLAY (PLAY BACK) NEXT PAUSE
01ZA8.2(TPL3)
3
C
LD5301
CH GND
FP-610 C5301
0.01u
VD5301 VD5302
B
FLEXIBLE 6P CN5302 6P
J9101
6 MIC_GND MIC_GND 6 R5309
D MIC
(PLUG IN POWER)
FB9101 0uH
5 EXT_MIC_L EXT_MIC_L 5
0
FB9102 0uH
4 EXT_MIC_R EXT_MIC_R 4
R5310
3 MIC_GND MIC_GND 3 0
2 REG_GND REG_GND 2
1 KEY_AD1_A KEY_AD1_A 1
S9101
SUPER NS/
COLOR SLOW S
CN5301 6P
SIGNAL PATH
E TO KEY_AD1 6
KEY_AD1
KEY_AD2
CK-127 BOARD AUDIO
CN5204 KEY_AD2 5
REG_GND 4
SIGNAL
(THROUGH THE
FP-607 FLEXIBLE ) EXT_MIC_R 3 REC
(PAGE 4-21) EXT_MIC_L 2
MIC_GND 1
PB
16
4-23 4-24 FB-220/FP-610

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(KP-CX5500) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(PS-CX5500)

A FUNCTION SWITCH A FUNCTION SWITCH
RV001
POWER ZOOM
CHASSIS GND
S002
T 14P
EXPOSURE LND001
1 REG_GND
LND002
2 ZOOM_AD
LND003
B S003
B LND004
3 D_2.8V
FOCUS W 4 XS/S_SW
D002 LND005
5 POWER_VCC
POWER LND006 TO
6 POWER_LED
LND007 VC-307 BOARD
6P 7 CHARGE_LED_ON (17/18)
LND006 LND008 CN1002
6 EXPOSURE CHG D001 8 VTR_UNREG
LND005 TLOU1008(T05,SOY) LND009 (PAGE 4-73
5 FOCUS 9 XRHOTO_STBY_SW of LEVEL3)
LND004 TO S004 LND010
4 REG_GND CK-127 BOARD 10 XCAM_ON_SW
LND003 CN5205 MODE LND011
C S001
ADJUSTMENT
LND002
3 DIAL_B
(PAGE 4-22) C LND012
11 XVTR_ON_SW
2 REG_GND 12 XPHOTO_FREEZE
NEAR+ FAR- LND001 LND013
1 DIAL_A (MOVIE) 13 KEY_AD0
(PLAY/EDIT) LND014
14 REG_GND
(STILL)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(KP-CX5500) is replaced as a block.

So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
D D
S007
16
POWER
ON
OFF(CHG)
E
S003
START/STOP
S001
F PHOTO(FREEZE)
S002
PHOTO(REC)
LND015
CHASSIS GND
G CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(PS-CX5500) is replaced as a block.

So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
16
KP-CX5500/PS-CX5500 4-25 4-26

Schematic diagram of the MD-097, SS-174T and
VC-307 boards are not shown.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS FP-611 FLEXIBLE BOARD

Refer to page 4-94 for printed wiring board of FP-611 flexible board.
1 2 3 4 5 6
FP-611 FLEXIBLE
AUDIO/VIDEO JACK
A
8P
LD9151 1
REG_GND 1 FB9152 0uH J9151
2
LD9152 3
VIDEO_I/O 2 4 AUDIO/VIDEO
LD9153 FB9153 0uH 5
TO AV_JACK_IN 3 6
LD9154 7
VC-307 BOARD REG_GND 4
(17/18) LD9155
CN1009 AUDIO_R_I/O 5
B (PAGE 4-74 REG_GND 6
LD9156 FB9151
0uH
of LEVEL3) LD9157
AUDIO_L_I/O 7
LD9158
REG_GND 8
D9151 D9152
01ZA8.2(TPL3) 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
LD9151
CH_GND
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
REC
D
PB
16
FP-611 4-79 4-80

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
Link
CD-428 BOARD MA-420 BOARD
PD-188 BOARD CK-127 BOARD
LB-084 BOARD FP-612 FLEXIBLE BOARD
FB-220 BOARD FP-608/609/610/611 FLEXIBLE BOARD
COMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS WAVEFORMS
MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards)

: Uses unleaded solder. Chip parts.
: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. Transistor Diode
(The other layers patterns are not indicated) C 6 5 4 4 5 6 5 4 4 5 3 3 3 1 23
Through hole is omitted.
Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 6 54
There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram
1 2 2 1 3 4 5 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 3 4
isnt mounted in this model.
C: panel designation
5 4 3 3 4 5 2 1 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
5 4
1 3
BOARD INFORMATION
parts location waveform pattern
board name CSP IC
(shown on page) (shown on page) number of layers layers not shown
CD-428 4-108 4-105 2
PD-188 4-108 4-105 2
LB-084 4-108 2
FB-220 4-108 2
MA-420 4-109 2
CK-127 4-109 2
SS-174T 4-112 8 2 to 7
MD-097 4-110 8 2 to 7 IC4602
IC1401, 1403, 2001,
3001, 3103, 3203, 3401,
VC-307 4-111 4-106 8 2 to 7
3403, 3501, 3601, 3602,
3603, 3701, 3801, 3803
4-81
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

CD-428 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD : Uses unleaded solder.
Refer to page 4-81 for common note for printed wiring board.
CD-428 BOARD(SIDE A) CD-428 BOARD(SIDE B)
5
A 1 7 A
1 2 C5004
R5002
LN5001
C5003
IC5001 B +
C5001
L5002
A +
L5001
B C5005
B
14 10 8
5 4 3
C5006
C5002
R5003
Q5001
2
C C
FB5002
R5001
10
CN5001
15
CN5002
20
1 2
27 25
26
D D
1-689-388- 11 11
1-689-388-
16
1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 16
4-83 4-84 CD-428

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
PD-188 (LCD DRIVE, BACKLIGHT DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

Refer to page 4-81 for common note for printed wiring board. : Uses unleaded solder.
PD-188 BOARD
LN6101 R6005
D6102
FB6002
D6101 C6014 C6009
35 30 C6010
3 1
+
A R6102 R6101 C6006
37
36 25
24
3
A
Q6102
2 RB6001
R6023 C6002 4 5
R6002 40 C6016
20 RB6002 R6106
C6001
C6103
R6001 4 IC6001 1 C6017
45 5 C6018
C6003
+
15
C6004
L6001
48
6 13 5 4 3 2 1
1 C6019
C6005 1 12
5 10
R6009
C6011 L6101
R6010
5
R6012
R6003
R6006
T6101
C6012
B R6007
R6004
9
R6011
C6008
CN6201
C6007
Q6003
10 48 37 6 10
FB6001
1 45 36
40
R6013
C6101
7 35
K D6001
1
R6018
2 3
R6008
C6013
C6020
5 A
IC6002
Q6004
R6017
15
IC6102
C6021
30 5 4
D6002 R6016
3
1
2 8
R6104
1 2 3
10 L6002
C6015
R6014 R6108
C6102
15
R6103
12 20 25 1 8
R6110
Q6005
R6019 C6105
20 13 24 R6105
R6020 Q6001 1 4 5
R6107
C6104
R6015
Q6002 Q6101
2 3
C 1
Q6104
C6023
D6003
2 3
R6022
C6024
IC6101 D6103
R6021
C6022 R6109
1 5 10
1 5 10 15 20 24
CN6001 CN6101
1-687-542-
D
D6104
11
16
1 2 3 4
PD-188 4-85 4-86

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
LB-084 (EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

FB-220 (FUNCTION SWITCH) PRINTED WIRING BOARD : Uses unleaded solder.
Refer to page 4-81 for common note for printed wiring board.
A
LB-084 BOARD(SIDE A) LB-084 BOARD(SIDE B) A
K A
D5601
R5606
ID5602
R5602 R5603
20 10 2
ID5603
CN5601
ID5601
B 19 15 5 1 D5602 B
LF5601
R5607
1 5 10 1516 HF5601
CN5602
3 2 1
R5605
C5601
R5604
IC5601
C5602
C 4 5 Q5602 C
1-689-392- 11 1-689-392-
11
16
1 2 2 1 16
FB-220 BOARD(SIDE A) FB-220 BOARD(SIDE B)

A A
CN5302
R5305
R5303
S5301 S5303 S5305 R5301
65 1
BACK LIGHT FADER REVIEW
R5309
D5301
C5301
B PLAY (PLAYBACK) X PAUSE x STOP . PREV
VD5301
VD5302
R5310
S5306 S5310 S5302 S5304 LD5301
1 56
B S5308
CN5301
R5308
R5306
B
> (NEXT) R5304
R5302
1-689-391- 11 1-689-391- 11
16
1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 16
4-87 4-88 LB-084/FB-220

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
MA-420 (PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SENSOR, MIC) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

MA-420 BOARD(SIDE A) MA-420 BOARD(SIDE B)
A A
LN5502
R5507
B B
FB5504
(YAW SENSOR)
22
FB5501
21
C5502
SE5501
20
15
CN5503
R5501
+
C5501
10
C C
A
FB5503 R5506
C5503
R5504
R5508 5
+ P
CN5501 2
1
SE5502
1 3 (PITCH SENSOR)
K
4 1
D5507
IC5501
D5503
D5502
D D
A
2 4
FB5502
D5504
R5503
R5502
VD5502
VD5501 D5501
E E
C Y
J5501
S VIDEO
F F
R5505
LN5501
G G
1-689-393- 11 1-689-393- 11
16
1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 16
MA-420 4-89 4-90

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
CK-127 (CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

FP-612 (PANEL REVERSE) FLEXIBLE PRINTED WIRING BOARD Refer to page 4-81 for common note for printed wiring board. : Uses unleaded solder.
CK-127 BOARD(SIDE A) CK-127 BOARD(SIDE B)

R5223
D5201D5202
A R5224 R5225 A
LD5202
R5210
S5211 CN5204 C5202 C5203
CN5206
S5210 65 1
S5209
z REC 1 5 10 15 20 6
5
VISUAL INDEX SET UP CN5202
S5207 1
S5208 (PANEL CLOSE) S5212
R5227
v (UP) S5203 CN5207
RESET 65 1
R5215
D5203
C5201
D5209CN5203
D5208 R5201
B S5214
ENTER
2 10 20 30 38 R5207 2
1
B
R5204 CN5201 R5211
S5215
R5222 R5218
S5213
R5212
1 5 15 25 35 39 R5226
R5208
B (RIGHT) D5204D5205
b (LEFT) S5204
R5206
S5216
D5207
VOL +
CN5205
BT5201 V (DOWN) 6
5
(LITHIUM BATTERY SECONDARY) 1
S5205
C VOL - C
S5201 S5206 LD5201
1-689-390- 11
EDIT DISPLAY/BATT INFO
1-689-390- 11
16
1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 16
CAUTION :
FP-612 BOARD Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
LD9206
LD9205
LD9204
LD9203
LD9202
LD9201
(PANEL REVERSE)
S9201
1-688-879- 12
4-91 4-92 CK-127/FP-612

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
FP-608 (USB, LANC), FP-609 (PLUNGER, EJECT), FP-610 (EXT MIC), FP-611 (AUDIO/VIDEO JACK) FLEXIBLE PRINTED WIRING BOARD
FP-608 BOARD FP-609 BOARD 1 8
LN9001
LN9057
LN9051
LN9058
LN9056
LN9055
LN9054
LN9053
LN9052
R9002
1
R9001
5
J9001
3
(LANC)
2 4
R9003 RY9051
7
10
LN9002 (USB)
LN9003
5
LN9004 OPEN/EJECT
CN9001
LN9005
LN9006
LN9007
LN9008
LN9009
1
1
LN9010
LN9011
S9052
6
S9053
(LID OPEN) S9051
R9052
1-688-875- 12
(LID OPEN)
R9051
D9051
1-688-876- 12
FP-610 BOARD FP-611 BOARD
J9101
MIC
(PLUG IN POWER)
D9151
FB9101
7 1
SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S LD9159
FB9151 4
3
AUDIO/VIDEO J9151
D9152
FB9153 LD9151 1
S9101 LD9152
6 LD9153
LD9154
FB9102
LD9155
LD9156
LD9157
LD9158 8
2
5 1-688-878-
12
1-688-877- 12 FB9152
LN9101
LN9102
LN9103
LN9104
LN9105
LN9106
Printed wiring board of the MD-097, SS-174T

6 1 and VC-307 board are not shown.
FP-608/FP-609/FP-610/FP-611 4-93 4-94

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
COVER CD-428 BOARD PD-188 BOARD
4-4. WAVEFORMS
CD-428 BOARD PD-188 BOARD
1 IC5001 1,2 1 IC6001 w; 6 IC6001 rk
7.3 Vp-p 480mVp-p

H H
7.8 Vp-p
H
2 IC5001 3,4 2 IC6001 ws 7 IC6002 1
7.3 Vp-p
2.8 Vp-p
H 7.7 Vp-p H
H
3 IC5001 8 3 IC6001 wf 8 IC6002 wh
690mVp-p 8.2 Vp-p 2.1 Vp-p

H H 89.8 nsec
4 IC5001 0 4 IC6001 rh 9 IC6002 rk
3.6 Vp-p 380mVp-p

55.5 nsec 2.8 Vp-p
H
V
5 IC5001 qa, qs 5 IC6001 rj
2.9 Vp-p 480mVp-p
55.5 nsec H
Waveforms of the VC-307 board is

not shown.
4-105 CD-428/PD-188
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4-5. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION no mark : side A

* mark : side B
CD-428 BOARD PD-188 BOARD LB-084 BOARD FB-220 BOARD
* C5001 B-2 C6001 A-2 R6001 A-2 * C5601 C-1 * C5301 B-2
C5002 C-1 C6002 A-1 R6002 A-2 * C5602 C-1
* C5003 A-1 C6003 A-2 R6003 B-3 * CN5301 B-4
* C5004 A-2 C6004 B-2 R6004 B-2 CN5601 B-1 * CN5302 A-1
* C5005 B-2 C6005 B-2 R6005 A-2 CN5602 C-2
C5006 C-2 C6006 A-2 R6006 B-2 * D5301 B-3
C6007 B-3 R6007 B-2 * D5601 A-2
* CN5001 C-1 C6008 B-2 R6008 B-2 * D5602 B-2 * R5301 A-4
CN5002 D-2 C6009 A-3 R6009 B-2 * R5302 B-3
C6010 A-3 R6010 B-2 * IC5601 C-2 * R5303 A-4
FB5002 C-2 C6011 B-2 R6011 B-2 * R5304 B-3
C6012 B-2 R6012 B-2 * Q5602 C-2 * R5305 A-4
IC5001 B-2 C6013 B-3 R6013 B-3 * R5306 B-3
C6014 A-2 R6014 C-2 * R5602 B-2 * R5308 B-3
* L5001 B-1 C6015 C-3 R6015 C-2 * R5603 B-2 * R5309 B-2
* L5002 B-2 C6016 A-3 R6016 C-2 * R5604 C-2 * R5310 B-2
C6017 A-3 R6017 C-2 * R5605 C-2
Q5001 C-1 C6018 A-3 R6018 B-2 * R5606 B-2 S5301 A-3
C6019 B-3 R6019 C-1 * R5607 B-2 S5302 B-3
R5001 C-1 C6020 B-2 R6020 C-1 S5303 A-3
* R5002 A-1 C6021 C-2 R6021 C-2 S5304 B-4
R5003 C-2 C6022 C-1 R6022 C-2 S5305 A-4
C6023 C-3 R6023 A-1 S5306 B-1
C6024 C-2 R6101 A-1 S5308 B-4
C6101 B-4 R6102 A-1 S5310 B-2
C6102 C-4 R6103 C-3
C6103 A-4 R6104 C-4 * VD5301 B-2
C6104 C-4 R6105 C-4 * VD5302 B-2
C6105 C-4 R6106 A-4
R6107 C-4
CN6001 D-2 R6108 C-4
CN6101 D-4 R6109 C-4
CN6201 B-1 R6110 C-4
CN6202 C-1
CN6203 D-3 RB6001 A-3
RB6002 A-3
D6001 B-3
D6002 C-2 T6101 B-4
D6003 C-3
D6101 A-1
D6102 A-1
D6103 C-4
D6104 D-3
FB6001 B-2
FB6002 A-2
IC6001 A-2
IC6002 C-2
IC6101 C-3
IC6102 C-4
L6001 B-2
L6002 C-3
L6101 B-4
Q6001 C-2
Q6002 C-2
Q6003 B-2
Q6004 C-2
Q6005 C-1
Q6101 C-3
Q6102 A-4
Q6103 A-4
Q6104 C-4
CD-428/PD-188/LB-084/FB-220 4-108
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
no mark : side A
* mark : side B
MA-420 BOARD CK-127 BOARD
* C5501 C-1 BT5201 A-2
* C5502 B-1
C5503 C-4 * C5201 B-3
* C5202 A-2
* CN5501 C-4 * C5203 A-2
* CN5503 C-3
* CN5201 B-3
* D5501 E-3 * CN5202 A-2
D5502 D-2 * CN5203 B-3
D5503 D-3 * CN5204 A-4
D5504 D-4 * CN5205 C-3
D5507 D-1 * CN5206 A-1
* CN5207 B-4
* FB5501 B-2
* FB5502 D-3 * D5201 A-2
* FB5503 C-2 * D5202 A-2
* FB5504 B-2 * D5203 B-3
* D5204 B-3
IC5501 D-4 * D5205 B-3
* D5207 B-4
J5501 F-4 * D5208 B-4
* D5209 B-3
* R5501 C-2
* R5502 E-4 * R5201 B-3
* R5503 E-4 * R5204 B-4
R5504 C-4 * R5206 B-3
* R5505 G-4 * R5207 B-3
* R5506 C-2 * R5208 B-4
* R5507 A-1 * R5210 A-3
R5508 C-2 * R5211 B-3
* R5212 B-4
* SE5501 B-1 * R5215 B-4
* SE5502 D-1 * R5218 B-4
* R5222 B-4
* VD5501 E-4 * R5223 A-4
VD5502 E-4 * R5224 A-4
* R5225 A-1
* R5226 B-3
* R5227 B-3
S5201 C-3
S5203 B-4
S5204 B-4
S5205 C-4
S5206 C-4
S5207 A-1
S5208 A-1
S5209 A-3
S5210 A-4
S5211 A-4
S5212 B-3
S5213 B-3
S5214 B-3
S5215 B-4
S5216 B-3
Mounted parts location of the MD-097,

SS-174T and VC-307 are not shown.
MA-420/CK-127
4-109E
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER NOTE
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

NOTE: Characters A to Z of the electrical parts list indicate location of exploded views in which the desired part is shown.
Link EXPLODED VIEWS
A B C
OVERALL SECTION F PANEL/BATTERY PANEL LENS SECTION EVF SECTION

SECTION
D E F G
MD SECTION CABINET (L) SECTION CABINET (R) SECTION LCD SECTION
Link ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ACCESSORIES
CD-428 BOARD B FP-610 BOARD F PD-188 BOARD G
CK-127 BOARD F FP-611 BOARD D MD-097 BOARD D
FB-220 BOARD F FP-612 BOARD G SS-174T BOARD D
FP-608 BOARD E LB-084 BOARD C VC-307 BOARD D
FP-609 BOARD E MA-420 BOARD A

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST
NOTE:
-XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences from When indicating parts by reference number,
the original one. please include the board name.
Items marked * are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine
service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. The components identified by mark 0 or
The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
supplied. Replace only with part number specified.
Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from Les composants identifis par une marque
the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set. 0 sont critiques pour la scurit.
Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant
CAPACITORS:
le numro spcifi.
uF: F
COILS
uH: H
RESISTORS
All resistors are in ohms.
METAL: metal-film resistor
METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor
F: nonflammable
SEMICONDUCTORS
In each case, u: , for example:
uA...: A... , uPA... , PA... ,
uPB... , PB... , uPC... , PC... ,
uPD..., PD...
Abbreviation
CND : Canadian model
AUS : Australian model
EE : East European model
HK : Hong Kong model
5-1
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS

5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
ns : not supplied
1 EVF section
10 (See page 5-6)
MD section
(See page 5-7)
1
Battery panel section
(See page 5-4)
C
B 1 1
1 1
1 ns
5 1 1
9 7
Lens section
(See page 5-5)
4
C 1 6
1
F panel section A
(See page 5-4)
Cabinet (R) section

(See page 5-9)
B
8
1
1
3 1
1
2 1
Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
1 3-080-198-31 SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2 6 3-078-889-11 SCREW (M1.7)
2 3-084-647-01 COVER (F), JACK (DVD100) 7 3-084-659-01 LID (BT), CPC
2 3-084-647-31 COVER (F), JACK (DVD100E) 8 3-084-660-01 LID (BOTTOM), CPC
3 X-3953-658-1 CAP ASSY, LENS 9 1-962-367-11 HARNESS (CV-068)
4 1-688-710-11 FP-605 FLEXIBLE BOARD 10 3-084-667-01 WATER PACKING
5 3-078-890-01 SCREW, TAPPING
5-3
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5-1-2. F PANEL AND BATTERY PANEL SECTION

ns : not supplied
55
51
52 MA
53 54 -4
20
MIC901 54
63 64
ns
ns
62 ns 56
ns
60 61
ns 57
54
59
58 65
BT901
51 X-3953-608-1 PANEL (650) ASSY, FRONT 60 3-084-750-01 SHEET METAL (UPPER), STRAP
52 3-084-724-01 PLATE, FRONT HEAT 61 3-968-771-01 SPRING, COMPRESSION
53 3-055-573-21 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 62 3-084-773-01 TAPE (BT)
54 3-078-890-01 SCREW, TAPPING 63 3-968-770-01 SHAFT, BT
55 A-7078-801-A MA-420 BOARD, COMPLETE 64 3-968-768-01 SPRING, LOCK
56 3-080-198-31 SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2 * 65 3-055-189-01 FOOT (A)

57 X-3953-600-1 PANEL ASSY, BATTERY BT901 1-694-772-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
58 3-084-666-01 SHEET, BATT MIC901 1-418-351-11 MICROPHONE UNIT
59 3-084-661-01 BRACKET (LOWER), STRAP
5-4
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5-1-3. LENS SECTION
108
109
107
113 114
102
IC5001 115
105
116 117 119
118
112
110 111
106
104 102
103 102
120
101
Be sure to read Precautions upon replacing CCD imager

on page 4-11 when changing the CCD imager.
101 3-084-692-01 SHEET, LENS (650) 112 3-053-973-01 RUBBER (W), SEAL
102 3-078-889-11 SCREW (M1.7) 113 A-7078-806-A CD-428 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE
103 3-084-691-01 SHEET, LF650 RADIATION 114 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2
104 3-084-684-02 FRAME (650), LENS 115 3-084-685-01 SHEET, CD RADIATION
105 3-078-890-01 SCREW, TAPPING 116 1-688-711-11 FP-606 FLEXIBLE BOARD
106 3-084-688-01 SHEET (L), SUCTIN WATER 117 3-084-343-01 HOLDER, LENS
107 1-785-594-11 CONNECTOR (HOT SHOE), OUTER 118 3-084-690-01 SHEET, ADHESIVE, CORE
108 1-688-709-11 FP-604 FLEXIBLE BOARD 119 1-469-298-31 FILTER, EMI
109 3-084-689-01 SHEET, HOT COPPER LEAF 120 3-084-686-01 HEAT SINK (650), CD
110 8-848-767-01 DEVICE, LENS LSV-650E IC5001 A-7111-334-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (DVD100)
111 1-758-155-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL IC5001 A-7111-335-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (DVD100E)
5-5
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5-1-4. EVF SECTION

ns : not supplied
162 168
167
165 ns
162 163
166
160
161
159
158
ns 157
164
155 162
LCD902
153
156
154
152
151
ns
151 3-080-198-31 SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2 161 3-080-614-01 SHEET (40), PRISM
152 X-3953-605-1 HINGE ASSY, VF 162 3-080-198-11 SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2
153 3-084-760-01 CABINET, VF TILT 163 X-3953-119-1 CABINET ASSY, LCD
154 1-688-708-11 FP-603 FLEXIBLE BOARD 164 3-080-617-11 CABINET (LOWER), VF SLIDE
155 X-3953-118-1 SLIDE ASSY, VF 165 X-3953-602-1 CABINET (UPPER) ASSY, VF SLIDE
156 3-083-290-01 SHEET VF 166 3-078-890-01 SCREW, TAPPING

157 A-7078-802-A LB-084 BOARD, COMPLETE 167 3-074-433-01 LABEL, COLOR (VF)
158 3-080-615-01 CUSHION (LB) (40) 168 X-3953-603-2 EYE CUP (55) ASSY
159 3-080-618-01 GUIDE (40), LAMP LCD902 8-753-036-70 LCX032ANA-5
160 3-080-613-01 ILLUMINATOR (40)
5-6
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5-1-5. MD SECTION
ns : not supplied
207
208
209
201
210
206
7
-09
Cabinet (L) section MD ns 211
(See page 5-8) 204
213 F
Refer to LEVEL 3
Exploded views of MD-097 ns
block assy.
(Pages 5-11 and 5-12)
07
-3
201 203 VC
202 212
201
201
201 3-078-889-11 SCREW (M1.7) 208 3-084-742-01 BASE (650), NS
202 3-084-658-01 FRAME, JK 209 3-084-662-01 BLIND, ZOOM
203 A-7078-812-A FP-611 BOARD, COMPLETE 210 3-080-198-31 SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2
204 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 211 3-087-264-01 SHEET, INSULATING, VC
206 CAUTION TAPE (0716) 212 A-7078-813-A VC-307 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
207 3-084-743-01 KNOB (650), NS 213 A-7111-651-A MP-097 BLOCK ASSY (SERVICE)
CAUTION :
For the parts of 206 : TAPE (0716) (3-084-668-01) cut
WOVEN (T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the
desired length and use it. 5-7
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5-1-6. CABINET (L) SECTION

ns : not supplied
254
261
257
255 262
260 263
253 ns
256
258
252 259
ns
251 257 ns
ns
ns
251 257
251 266
267
265
268
267
251
264
251 3-078-890-01 SCREW, TAPPING 260 3-087-322-01 SCREW (M1.7), EG GRIP, P2
252 A-7078-811-A FP-609 BOARD, COMPLETE 261 3-084-764-01 COVER, D LID
253 3-084-664-01 SHEET METAL, PWB RETAINER 262 3-084-737-01 CLAW, LID LOCK
254 X-3953-601-3 CABINET (L) ASSY 263 3-084-771-01 BELT, GRIP
255 X-3953-598-2 FRAME ASSY, EJECT 264 A-7078-800-A FP-608 BOARD, COMPLETE
256 3-068-457-01 SHAFT, STRAP 265 CAUTION TAPE (0716)

257 3-973-497-91 SCREW (M1.7), 0-NO. +P 2 266 1-477-795-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-CX5500)
258 3-080-204-01 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 267 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2
259 X-3953-599-1 HINGE ASSY, D LID 268 3-084-645-01 COVER (L), JACK
CAUTION :
For the parts of 265 : TAPE (0716) (3-084-668-01) cut
WOVEN (T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the
desired length and use it.
5-8
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
5-1-7. CABINET (R) SECTION

309 309
ns : not supplied
310
309
312 LCD section
(See page 5-10)
303
FB
-22
0
A
306 311
316 B
308
317
314 323
307 318
ns 319 313
306
322
320
324
314
315
303 305 321 314

SP901
CK
-12 306
7 314
B
321
304
302
CAUTION 1 :
303 Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
301 Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
: BT5201 (Lithium battery) CK-127 board on the mount position. (See page 4-91)
301 3-055-257-11 TRIPOD (LARGE) 314 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2
302 X-3953-607-1 FRAME (25) ASSY, BOTTOM 315 1-477-796-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (KP-CX5500)
303 3-078-890-01 SCREW, TAPPING 316 X-3953-604-1 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100)
304 1-688-707-11 FP-602 FLEXIBLE BOARD 316 X-3953-638-1 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100E)
305 A-7078-807-A CK-127 (25) BOARD, COMPLETE 317 3-084-693-01 COVER (U), JACK
306 CAUTION2 TAPE (0716) 318 3-084-706-01 CUSHION (25), PANEL

307 1-688-712-11 FP-607 FLEXIBLE BOARD 319 4-942-636-01 EMBLEM (NO.3.5), SONY
308 3-084-697-01 SHEET METAL, FB RETAINER 320 3-084-696-01 SPRING, HINGE BLIND
309 3-078-889-11 SCREW (M1.7) 321 3-084-817-31 SCREW (M1.7), SCOTCH GRIP, P2
310 A-7078-809-A FP-610 BOARD, COMPLETE 322 CAUTION2 TAPE (HS)
311 A-7078-808-A FB-220 BOARD, COMPLETE 323 X-3953-606-1 CABINET (25) ASSY, SIDE
312 3-085-252-01 SHEET, FB MUFFLE 324 3-085-070-01 SHEET, INSULATING, CD
313 3-080-198-31 SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2 SP901 1-825-260-21 LOUD SPEAKER (1.6CM)
CAUTION 2 :
For the parts of 306 : TAPE (0716) (3-084-668-01) and
TAPE (HS) (3-084-810-01) cut WOVEN (T0.25), FABRIC NON
5-9 (3-076-631-01) into the desired length and use it.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5-1-8. LCD SECTION

ns : not supplied
361
362
364
B 365
ns 359
LCD901 A
360
363
ns B
ND901
C
356
358
355
357
354
353
352 PD
A -1
88
351
352
351 X-3953-596-1 CABINET (C) (25) ASSY, P 360 3-083-293-01 COVER (O) (25), HINGE
352 3-087-322-01 SCREW (M1.7), EG GRIP, P2 361 A-7078-810-A FP-612 BOARD, COMPLETE
353 1-962-364-12 HARNESS (PV-018) 362 X-3953-595-1 HINGE (25) ASSY, LCD
354 3-078-889-11 SCREW (M1.7) 363 3-084-710-01 SHEET, ADHESIVE, PR
355 A-7078-799-A PD-188 (25) BOARD, COMPLETE 364 3-083-294-01 COVER (U) (25), HINGE
356 X-3953-594-1 FRAME (25) ASSY, P 365 3-973-497-91 SCREW (M1.7), 0-NO. +P 2
357 3-084-782-01 SPRING, P LOCK 0 ND901 1-477-756-31 BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (2.5)
358 3-084-785-01 BUTTON, P LOCK LCD901 8-753-052-14 ACX307AKA-J
359 3-083-291-01 CABINET (M) (25), P
Exploded view and parts list of MD-097

BLOCK are not shown. Page 5-11 and 5-
12 are not shown.
Note : Note :
5-10
Ver 1.1 2003. 12 DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
CD-428 CK-127 FB-220
5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

A-7078-806-A CD-428 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE < DIODE >
***************************
(IC5001 is not included in this complete board.) D5203 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
D5204 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
< CAPACITOR > D5205 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
D5207 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
C5001 1-165-897-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 10V D5208 8-719-056-85 DIODE UDZSTE-178.2B
C5002 1-162-915-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.5PF 50V
C5003 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V D5209 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
C5004 1-113-985-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 20V
C5005 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V < RESISTOR >
C5006 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R5201 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0
R5204 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
< CONNECTOR > R5206 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W
R5207 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W
CN5001 1-784-421-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 27P R5208 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W
CN5002 1-794-375-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 2P
R5210 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W
< FERRITE BEAD > R5211 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W
R5212 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W
FB5002 1-414-554-21 FERRITE 0uH R5215 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
R5218 1-218-960-11 RES-CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/16W
< IC >
R5222 1-218-964-11 RES-CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W
IC5001 A-7111-334-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD100) R5223 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
IC5001 A-7111-335-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD100E) R5224 1-218-960-11 RES-CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/16W
R5225 1-218-964-11 RES-CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W
< COIL > R5226 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0
L5001 1-414-406-11 INDUCTOR 220uH R5227 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W

L5002 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
< SWITCH >
< TRANSISTOR >
S5201 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (EDIT)
Q5001 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 S5203 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (RESET)
S5204 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (VOL+)
< RESISTOR > S5205 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (VOL-)
S5206 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (DISPLAY/BATT INFO)
R5001 1-216-832-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W
************************************************************ S5207 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (PANEL_CLOSE)
S5209 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (VISUAL INDEX)
A-7078-807-A CK-127 (25) BOARD, COMPLETE S5210 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (SETUP)
************************** S5211 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (REC z)
S5212 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (v UP)
< BATTERY >
S5213 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (b LEFT)
0 BT5201 1-756-128-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY) S5214 1-786-157-31 TACTILE SWITCH (ENTER)
S5215 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (B RIGHT)
< CONNECTOR > S5216 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (V DOWN)
***********************************************************
CN5201 1-784-423-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 39P
CN5202 1-794-997-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 20P A-7078-808-A FB-220 BOARD, COMPLETE
CN5203 1-778-506-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 2P **********************
CN5205 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P < CAPACITOR >
CN5206 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P C5301 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V
< CONNECTOR >

Be sure to read Precautions upon replacing CCD imager
on page 4-11 when changing the CCD imager. CN5301 1-691-344-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 6P
CAUTION :
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Note : Note :
5-13
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
FB-220 FP-608 FP-609 FP-610 FP-611 FP-612 LB-084
< DIODE > < SWITCH >
D5301 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3) S9051 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (LID OPEN)
S9052 1-786-179-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (LID OPEN)
< RESISTOR > S9053 1-786-180-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (OPEN)
************************************************************
R5301 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W
R5302 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W A-7078-809-A FP-610 BOARD, COMPLETE
R5303 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W **********************
R5304 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W
R5305 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W < FERRITE BEAD >
R5306 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W FB9101 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0uH

R5308 1-218-960-11 RES-CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/16W FB9102 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0uH
R5309 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
R5310 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W < JACK >
< SWITCH > J9101 1-691-737-41 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (MIC (PLUG IN POWER))
S5301 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (BACK LIGHT) < SWITCH >

S5302 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (x STOP)
S5303 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (FADER) S9101 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S)
S5304 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (. PREV) ************************************************************
S5305 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (REVIEW)
A-7078-812-A FP-611 BOARD, COMPLETE
S5306 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (B PLAY (PLAYBACK)) **********************
S5308 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (> NEXT)
S5310 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (X PAUSE) < DIODE >
< VARISTOR > D9151 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3)

D9152 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
VD5301 1-801-862-11 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608)
VD5302 1-801-862-11 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608) < FERRITE BEAD >
************************************************************
FB9151 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0uH
A-7078-800-A FP-608 BOARD, COMPLETE FB9152 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0uH
********************* FB9153 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0uH
< CONNECTOR > < JACK >
CN9001 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE (USB 5P) J9151 1-778-040-11 JACK, SMALL TYPE (AUDIO/VIDEO)
***********************************************************
< JACK >
A-7078-810-A FP-612 BOARD, COMPLETE
J9001 1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE ( (LANC)) **********************
< RESISTOR > < SWITCH >
R9002 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W S9201 1-771-338-31 SWITCH, PUSH (PANEL REVERSE)
R9003 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 ***********************************************************
************************************************************
A-7078-802-A LB-084 BOARD, COMPLETE
A-7078-811-A FP-609 BOARD, COMPLETE **********************
**********************
< CAPACITOR >
< DIODE >
C5601 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
D9051 8-719-073-33 DIODE CL-165HR/YG-D-T C5602 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V
< RESISTOR > < CONNECTOR >
R9051 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W CN5601 1-779-334-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 20P
R9052 1-216-816-11 METAL CHIP 390 5% 1/16W CN5602 1-691-354-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 16P
< RELAY > < DIODE >
RY9051 1-454-583-11 SOLENOID, PLUNGER D5602 6-500-375-01 DIODE NSCW455T-TC9
5-14
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
LB-084 MA-420 PD-188
< IC > < VARISTOR >
IC5601 8-759-581-11 IC NJM2125F(TE2) VD5501 1-803-974-21 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608)

VD5502 1-803-974-21 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608)
< TRANSISTOR > ***********************************************************
Q5602 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) A-7078-799-A PD-188 (25) BOARD, COMPLETE

**************************
< RESISTOR >
< CAPACITOR >
R5603 1-208-941-11 METAL CHIP 180K 0.5% 1/16W
R5604 1-208-721-11 METAL CHIP 39K 0.5% 1/16W C6001 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V
R5605 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W C6002 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
R5606 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W C6003 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
R5607 1-211-983-11 METAL CHIP 39 0.5% 1/10W C6004 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
************************************************************ C6005 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
A-7078-801-A MA-420 BOARD, COMPLETE C6007 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
*********************** C6008 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
C6009 1-135-177-21 TANTALUM CHIP 1uF 20% 20V
< CAPACITOR > C6010 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
C6011 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V
C5503 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
< CONNECTOR > C6013 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V
C6014 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
CN5501 1-778-507-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 4P C6015 1-164-870-11 CERAMIC CHIP 68PF 5% 50V
CN5503 1-764-529-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 22P C6016 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
< DIODE > C6017 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
C6018 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
D5501 8-719-056-85 DIODE UDZSTE-178.2B C6019 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V
D5503 6-500-512-01 DIODE CL-330IRS-X-TU C6022 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
D5504 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 C6023 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
D5507 8-719-064-07 DIODE SML-310LTT86
< FERRITE BEAD > C6101 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V
FB5501 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH C6104 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
FB5502 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH 0 C6105 1-100-371-11 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 5% 3.15KV
FB5503 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
FB5504 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH < CONNECTOR >
< IC > CN6001 1-815-031-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P

CN6101 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P
IC5501 8-742-221-00 HYB IC SBX3055-01 CN6201 1-794-997-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 20P
< JACK > < DIODE >
J5501 1-778-518-11 CONNECTOR, EXTERNAL (S VIDEO) D6001 8-719-084-47 DIODE 1SV290(TPL3)

D6003 8-719-050-42 DIODE RD3.3UM-T1B
< RESISTOR > D6103 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
D6104 8-719-059-47 DIODE PG1111R-TR
R5501 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
R5502 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W < FERRITE BEAD >
R5503 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
R5504 1-216-805-11 METAL CHIP 47 5% 1/16W FB6001 1-414-760-21 FERRITE 0uH
R5505 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W FB6002 1-414-760-21 FERRITE 0uH
R5506 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W < IC >

R5507 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
R5508 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 IC6001 8-752-109-08 IC CXA3289BR-T4
IC6002 8-752-407-33 IC CXD3512R-T4
< SENSOR > IC6101 8-759-564-49 IC TC7W53FU(TE12R)
IC6102 8-759-075-70 IC TA75S393F-TE85R
SE5501 1-476-807-31 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (YAW)
SE5502 1-476-807-41 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (PITCH)
Note : Note :
5-15
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E Ver 1.1 2003. 12
PD-188 MD-097 SS-174T VC-307
< COIL > A-7078-804-A MD-097 BOARD, COMPLETE (Note1)
******************************
L6001 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
L6002 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH ************************************************************
L6101 1-428-878-11 INDUCTOR 82uH
A-7078-805-A SS-174T BOARD, COMPLETE
< TRANSISTOR > **********************
Q6001 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) ************************************************************

Q6002 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)
Q6003 6-550-234-01 TRANSISTOR UNR32A300LS0 A-707-881-3A VC-307 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE
Q6004 6-550-232-01 TRANSISTOR 2SA207800LS0 ***************************
Q6005 6-550-232-01 TRANSISTOR 2SA207800LS0
************************************************************
Q6101 6-550-234-01 TRANSISTOR UNR32A300LS0
Q6102 6-550-065-01 TRANSISTOR CPH5504-TL-E
Q6104 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR RN4983FE(TPLR3) Electrical parts list of the MD-097, SS-174T
< RESISTOR > and VC-307 board are not shown.
R6001 1-208-931-11 METAL CHIP 68K 0.5% 1/16W
R6002 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
R6003 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R6004 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R6006 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
R6007 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

R6008 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
R6009 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
R6010 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R6011 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
R6012 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W

R6013 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R6014 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R6015 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R6016 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R6017 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

R6018 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W
R6019 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R6020 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
R6021 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W
R6022 1-208-957-11 RES-CHIP 820K 5% 1/16W

R6023 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0
R6103 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R6104 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W
R6105 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R6106 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W

R6107 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R6108 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R6109 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
R6110 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
< COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK >
RB6001 1-234-372-21 RES, NETWORK 100X4 (1005)
< TRANSFORMER >
0 T6101 1-435-786-31 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER

************************************************************ Note1 :
Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK
ASSY (A-7111-651-A) and not for the single MD-097
board, complete.
Note : Note :
5-16
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Checking supplied accessories.

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.
Power cord (Main lead)(1) AC power adaptor (1) (AC-L15A) NP-FM50 battery pack (1) A/V connecting cable
(AEP, EE, E model) 0 1-477-533-32 (not supplied) (1.5m) (1)
0 1-769-608-11 1-824-097-11
Power cord (Main lead)(1)
(AUS model) Lid Battery
0 1-696-819-21 Case
(3-709-572-01)
Power cord (Main lead)(1)
(UK, HK model)
0 1-783-374-11 R6 (size AA) batteries Shoulder strap (1)
Power cord (Main lead)(1) for the Remote 3-987-015-01
(US, CND model) Commander (2)
0 1-790-107-22 Wireless Remote Commander (1) (not supplied)
(RMT-820)
1-477-868-21
Lens cap (1) USB cable (1) DVD-R (DMR30) (1)

X-3953-658-1 1-823-930-11 (not supplied)
CD-ROM Cleaning cloth (1)

(SPVD-011 (I) USB Driver) (1) 3-073-861-01
(US, CND model)
3-086-131-01
CD-ROM
(SPVD-011 USB Driver) (1) 2-pin conversion adaptor (1) 21-pin conversion connector (1)
(AEP, UK, EE, E, HK, (E, HK model) (AEP, UK, EE model)
AUS model) 1-569-008-12 1-770-783-21
3-086-132-01
Abbreviation
CND : Canadian model HK : Hong Kong model
EE : East European model AUS : Australian model
Other accessories 3-081-302-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH/RUSSIAN)

3-081-300-13 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)(DVD100:US,CND,E) (DVD100E:E)
3-081-300-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH)(DVD100:CND) 3-081-302-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC/PERSIAN)
3-081-300-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (DVD100E:E)
(DVD100:E) 3-081-302-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE)
3-081-300-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE) (DVD100E:HK)
(DVD100:E) 3-081-302-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)
3-081-300-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(DVD100:E) (DVD100E:E)
3-081-302-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH/FRENCH)

(DVD100E:AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS)
Note : Note :
3-081-302-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) The components identified by Les composants identifis par
(DVD100E:AEP) mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
3-081-302-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/GREEK)(DVD100E:AEP) 0 are critical for safety. pour la scurit.
3-081-302-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (GERMAN/DUTCH) Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
(DVD100E:AEP) specified. pice portant le numro spcifi.
5-32E
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Sony EMCS Co. 2003L1600-1

9-876-273-31 2003.12
114 Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
COVER
[Description of main button functions on toolbar of the Adobe Acrobat Reader Ver5.0 (for Windows)]
Toolbar
Printing a text Moving with link

1. Click the Print button .
1. Select either palm tool , zoom tool , text selection tool
2. Specify a printer, print range, number of copies, and other op-
tions, and then click [OK]. , or graphic selection tool .
2. Place the pointer in the position in a text where the link exists
(such as a button on cover and the table of contents page, or
Application of printing:
blue characters on the removal flowchart page or drawing
To set a range to be printed within a page, select the graphic
page), and the pointer will change to the forefinger form .
selection tool and drag on the page to enclose a range to 3. Then, click the link. (You will go to the link destination.)
be printed, and then click the Print button.
Moving with bookmark:

Click an item (text) on the bookmark pallet, and you can move
Finding a text to the link destination. Also, clicking can display the
1. Click the Find button . hidden items.
2. Enter a character string to be found into a text box, and click (To go back to original state, click )
the [Find]. (Specify the find options as necessary)
3. Open the find dialog box again, and click the [Find Again] and
you can find the matched character strings displayed next.
(Character strings entered previously are displayed as they are
in the text box.)
Application to the Service Manual:

The parts on the drawing pages (block diagrams, circuit dia-
grams, printed circuit boards) and parts list pages in a text
can be found using this find function. For example, find a
Ref. No. of IC on the block diagram, and click the [Find Again] Zooming or rotating the screen display
continuously, so that you can move to the Ref. No. of IC on Zoom in
the circuit diagram or printed circuit board diagram succes- Select the zoom tool and click the page.
sively. Select the zoom tool and drag a range to be zoomed in.
Note: The find function may not be applied to the Service
Manual depending on the date of issue.
Zoom out
Select the zoom-out tool and click the page.
Switching a page Select the zoom-out tool and drag a range to be zoomed
To move to the first page, click the . out.
To move to the last page, click the .

Zoom in/out
To move to the previous page, click the . Click the triangle button in the zoom control box to select the
To move to the next page, click the . display magnification. Or, you may click or for zoom-
ing in or out.
Reversing the screens displayed once

To reverse the previous screens (operation) one by one, click
the .
To advance the reversed screens (operation) one by one, click Rotate
the . Click rotate tool , and the page then rotates 90 degrees each.
Application to the Service Manual: Application to the Service Manual:

The printed circuit board diagram you see now can be changed
This function allows you to go and back between circuit dia-
to the same direction as the set.
gram and printed circuit board diagram, and accordingly it
will be convenient for the voltage check.
Reverse 987627332.pdf
Revision History
S.M. Rev.
Ver. Date History Contents
issued
1.0 2003.08 Official Release
1.1 2003.12 Correction-1 Correction of the schematic diagrams, printed Yes
wiring boards, waveforms, repair parts list.
S.M. correction: Page 4-11, 4-13, 4-92, 4-105,
5-3, 5-9, 5-13, 5-16
LEVEL 1
2
US Model
SERVICE MANUAL Canadian Model
DCR-DVD100
Ver 1.1 2003. 12 AEP Model
UK Model
East European Model
Hong Kong Model
Australian Model
DCR-DVD100E
E Model
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
CORRECTION-1
Correct your service manual as shown below.
Correction of the schematic diagrams, printed

wiring boards, waveforms, repair parts list.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS : Changed portion.
Page INCORRECT CORRECT
CD-428 BOARD CD-428 BOARD
(Location C-2) (Location C-2)
R-6.4
R-6.4
R-0.3
R-0.3
R-6.4
R-6.4
R-0.3
R-0.3
ICX221BK-13 (DVD100E)
R9.1
R9.1
ICX220BK-13 (DVD100)
R12.0
R12.0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ICX220BK-13
V4
V3
V2
V1
V_HOLD
V_DRAIN
VDD
V4
V3
V2
V1
V_HOLD
V_DRAIN
VDD
4-11 IC5001 IC5001
CCD IMAGER 1 2 CCD IMAGER 1 2
3 3
IC5001
IC5001
5 4 5 4
CCD_OUT
CCD_OUT
GND
GND
SUB
SUB
RG
RG
H2
H1
H2
H1
VL
VL
* *
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
6.8
0.4
6.8
0.4
6
0
4
0
7
0
3
0
5
0
6
0
4
0
7
0
3
0
5
0
PD-188 BOARD (1/2) PD-188 BOARD (1/2)
(Location B-10) (Location B-10)
FB6002 0uH FB6002 0uH
C6009 C6010 C6009 C6010

1u 0.01u 1u 0.01u
BGP
BLK
PRG
FRP
PFRP
BGP
BLK
PRG
FRP
PFRP
25V B 25V B
TA TA
4-13
R6005 R6005
XX XX
13.5
1.9
2.7
2.8
1.4
1.4
2.8
7.0
3.3
1.9
2.7
2.8
1.4
1.4
2.8
7.0
3.3
0
0
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
N.C.
EXT_DA
N.C
BGP
BLACK_IN
PRG
FRP
PFRP
VP
P_DC_DET
Vcc2
N.C.
EXT_DA
N.C
BGP
BLACK_IN
PRG
FRP
PFRP
VP
P_DC_DET
Vcc2
XVP.SAVE
XVP.SAVE
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS : Changed portion.

CK-127 BOARD (SIDE B) CK-127 BOARD (SIDE B)
(Location B-4) (Location B-4)
R5215 R5215
D5203
D5203
C5201 C5201
R5201 R5201
2 10 20 30 38 2 10 20 30 38
CN5201 R5211 CN5201 R5211
4-92
R5222 R5218
R5222 R5218
R5212
R5212
1 5 15 25 35 39 1 5 15 25 35 39
R5208 R5208
D5204 D5204
D5207
D5207
2
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4-3. WAVEFORMS : Changed portion.

CD-428 BOARD CD-428 BOARD
5 IC5001 qa 5 IC5001 qa, qs
4-105
2.9 Vp-p 2.9 Vp-p
55.5 nsec 55.5 nsec
SECTION 5 REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS : Changed portion.
5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
5-3
10 3-084-667-01 WATER PAKING 10 3-084-667-01 WATER PACKING
5-1-7. CABINET (R) SECTION

5-9 316 X-3953-604-1 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100) 316 X-3953-604-1 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100)
316 X-3953-638-2 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100E) 316 X-3953-638-1 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100E)
5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST : Changed portion. : Added portion.

A-7078-806-A CD-428 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE A-7078-806-A CD-428 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE
*************************** ***************************
(IC5001 is not included in this complete board.) (IC5001 is not included in this complete board.)
5-13
< IC > < IC >
IC5001 A-7111-334-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD200) IC5001 A-7111-334-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD100)
IC5001 A-7111-335-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD200E) IC5001 A-7111-335-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD100E)
A-7078-804-A MD-097 BOARD, COMPLETE A-7078-804-A MD-097 BOARD, COMPLETE (Note1)
********************* *****************************
************************************************************ ************************************************************
5-16
Note1 :
Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK
ASSY (A-7111-651-A) and not for the single MD-097
board, complete.
3
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Sony EMCS Co. 2003L1600-1

9-876-273-91 2003.12
4 Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
Ver 1.0 2003. 08 SECTION 6 ADJ

Revision History ADJUSTMENTS
How to use
Acrobat Reader
Link
Before starting adjustment VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D, E, F, 1F PAGE DATA SERVICE MODE

CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER
COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT DATA PROCESS
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SERVICE MODE
Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service Manual

CONTENTS LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3
1. SERVICE NOTE a
2. DISASSEMBLY a
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS OVERALL
POWER
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND CD-428, PD-188, LB-084, MD-097, SS-174T, VC-307
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MA-420, CK-127, FB-220 BOARD
BOARD,
(KP-CX5500, PS-CX5500),
FP-610, FP-611 FLEXIBLE
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST EXPLODED VIEWS
ELECTRICAL PARTS a (MD-097, SS-174T, VC-307 BOARD)
2003H1600-1
2003.8
9-876-273-51 Sony EMCS Co. Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6. ADJUSTMENT 6-2. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT 6-36
1. Before starting adjustment 6-1 2-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS 6-36
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards. 6-2 2-1-1. Equipment to Required 6-36
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT 6-4 2-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting 6-37
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT 2-1-3. Adjusting Connectors 6-38
(CAMERA SECTION) 6-4 2-1-4. Connecting the Equipment 6-38
1-1-1. List of Service Tools 6-4 2-1-5. Input/Output Level and Impedance 6-39
1-1-2. Preparations 6-5 2-2. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 6-40
1-1-3. Precaution 6-7 1. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-307 Board) 6-40
1. Setting the Switch 6-7 2. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment
2. Order of Adjustments 6-7 (VC-307 Board) 6-40
3. Subjects 6-7 3. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-307 Board) 6-41
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D, E, F, 1F PAGE DATA 6-8 2-3. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 6-42
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D PAGE DATA 6-8 1. Overall Level Characteristics Check 6-42
1. Initializing the A, B, C, D Page Data 6-8 2. Overall Distortion Check 6-42
2. Modification of A, B, C, D Page Data 6-8 3. Overall Noise Level Check 6-42
3. A Page Table 6-9 6-3. SERVICE MODE 6-43
4. B Page Table 6-9 3-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER 6-43
5. C Page Table 6-10 1. Using the adjustment remote commander 6-43
6. D Page Table 6-10 2. Precautions upon using the adjustment
1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 1F PAGE DATA 6-11 remote commander 6-43
1. Initializing the E, F, 1F Page Data 6-11 3-2. DATA PROCESS 6-44
2. Modification of E, F, 1F Page Data 6-11 3-3. SERVICE MODE 6-45
3. E Page Table 6-11 1. Setting the Test Mode 6-45
4. F Page Table 6-12 2. Bit value discrimination 6-45
5. 1F Page Table 6-13 3. Switch check (1) 6-46
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 6-14 4. Switch check (2) 6-46
1. 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-14 5. Switch check (3) 6-46
2. HALL Adjustment 6-14 6. Switch check (4) 6-47
3. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) 6-15 7. Record of Use check 6-47
4. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Flange Back Adjustment 8. Record of Self-diagnosis check 6-48
Chart and Subject More Than 500m Away) 6-16
4-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) 6-16
4-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) 6-16 * Optical axis frame and Color reproduction frame are
5. Flange Back Check 6-17 shown on pages 6-49 and 6-50.
6. Optical Axis Adjustment 6-18
7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment 6-19
8. Picture Frame Setting 6-20
9. Color Reproduction Adjustment 6-21
10. MAX GAIN Adjustment 6-22
11. LV Standard Data Input 6-22
12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame) 6-23
13. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input 6-23
14. Auto White Balance Adjustment 6-24
15. White Balance Check 6-25
16. Steady Shot Check 6-26
1-4. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENT 6-27
1. VCO Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-28
2. RGB AMP Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-29
3. Contrast Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-29
4. White Balance Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-30
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 6-31
1. VCO Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-31
2. Bright Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-32
3. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-32
4. PSIG GLAY Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-33
5. Contrast Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-33
6. Center Level Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-34
7. V COM Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-34
8. White Balance Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-35
2
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER SECTION 6
ADJUSTMENTS
1. Before starting adjustment
EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct.
Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.
Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board
is replaced.
(Machine before starting repair) (Machine after a board is replaced)
PC PC
Save the EVR data Download the saved

to a personal computer. data to a machine.
Procedure 2
Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM
to the replaced board.
Remove the EEPROM and install it.
(Former board) (New board)
Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or
installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired)
Download the data.
Save the data.
(The same model of the same destination)
After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the

respective items of the EVR data.
(Refer to page 6-3 for the items to be checked.)
6-1
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards.

Adjusting items when replacing main parts
When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Replaced parts
Block replacement Parts replacement
MA-420 board SE5501/5502 (YAW/PITCH sensor)
VC-307 board IC1301, X1301 (Timing generator)

VC-307 board IC2202 (Timing generator (EVF))
PD-188 board IC6002 (Timing generator (LCD))
VC-307 board IC3501 (DVD system controller)

VC-307 board IC2101 (Video IN/OUT AMP)
PD-188 board IC6001 (RGB driver (LCD))
VC-307 board IC2201 (RGB driver (EVF))

LB-084 board D5602 (Back light (EVF))
VC-307 board IC1302 (S/H, A/D conv.)

Color EVF block LCD902 (LCD panel)
CD-428 board IC5001 (CCD imager)
LCD block ND901 (Fluorescent tube)
LCD block LCD901 (LCD panel)
VC-307 board IC1901 (EVR)

Adjustment Section Adjustment
Lens device
Base unit
Initialization of A, B, C, Initialization of A, B, C, D page data

D, E, F, 1F page data Initialization of E, F, 1F page data
36MHz origin oscillation adj. z z
HALL adj. z
Flange back adj. z z
Optical axis adj. z z
Mechanical shutter adj. z
Camera Color reproduction adj. z z
MAX GAIN adj. z z
LV standard data input z z
AWB standard data input z z
Auto white balance adj. z z
Steady shot check z
VCO adj. z z
RGB AMP adj. z
Color EVF
Contrast adj. z z
White balance adj. z z z
VCO adj. z z
Bright adj. z
Black limit adj. z
PSIG GRAY adj. z
LCD
Contrast adj. z z
Center level adj. z
V COM adj. z
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. z z
Video
S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj. z z
Table. 6-1-1(1).
6-2
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Adjusting items when replacing a board or EEPROM

When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Board EEPROM
replacement replacement
VC-307 board IC3401 (Flash memory)
MD-097 board IC4702 (Flash memory)

VC-307 board IC3004 (EEPROM)
VC-307 board IC3302 (EEPROM)
MD-097 board IC4201 (EEPROM)

MA-420 board (COMPLETE)
MD-097 board (COMPLETE)

Adjustment Section Adjustment
CD-428 board (COMPLETE)
VC-307 board (COMPLETE)

LB-084 board (COMPLETE)
PD-188 board (COMPLETE)
Supportng
Initialization of A, B, C, Initialization of A, B, C, D page data z z
D, E, F, 1F page data Initialization of E, F, 1F page data z z
36MHz origin oscillation adj. z z
HALL adj. z z z
Flange back adj. z z z z
Optical axis adj. z z z
Mechanical shutter adj. z z z
Camera Color reproduction adj. z z z
MAX GAIN adj. z z z z
LV standard data input z z z z
AWB standard data input z z z z
Auto white balance adj. z z z z
Steady shot check z z z z
VCO adj. z z
RGB AMP adj. z z
Color EVF
Contrast adj. z z
VCO adj. z z z
Bright adj. z z z
Black limit adj. z z z
PSIG GRAY adj. z z z
LCD
Contrast adj. z z z
Center level adj. z z z
V COM adj. z z z
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. z z
Video
S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj. z z
Table. 6-1-1(2).
6-3
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT

1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION)
1-1-1. List of Service Tools

Oscilloscope Color monitor Vectorscope
Digital voltmeter
Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage

Auto white balance adjustment/check
J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A White balance adjustment/check
ND filter 1.0 J-6080-808-A White balance check
J-2 ND filter 0.4 J-6080-806-A White balance check
ND filter 0.1 J-6080-807-A White balance check
J-3 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A
J-4 Color chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A
Adjustment remote commander
J-5 (RM-95 upgraded) J-6082-053-B
J-6 Siemens star chart J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back
J-7 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A
For adjusting the color viewfinder
J-8 CPC-8 jig J-6082-388-A For adjusting the LCD block
For checking the base unit
For extension between the MD-097 board (CN4901) and
J-9 Extension cable (100P, 0.5mm) J-6082-352-A the VC-307 board (CN1008)
J-10 Mini pattern box J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back
J-11 Camera table J-6082-384-A For adjusting the flange back
J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5
J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10
J-11
Fig. 6-1-1.
6-4
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1-1-2. Preparations
Note1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to 2. Pattern box
DISASSEMBLY.
Note2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards
need not be disassembled.
Note3: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0,
address: 10 is 00. If not, set data: 00 to this address.
1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1-3. 1.5 m
Note4: As removing the cabinet (R) assembly (removing CN1007 of the

VC-307 board) means removing the lithium 3V power supply
(BT5201 on the CK-127 board), data such as date, time, user-set
menus will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data.
But the self-diagnosis data and the data on history of use (user
initial power on date, final condensation occurrence data) will be
kept even if the lithium 3V power supply is removed. (Refer to
6-3. Service Mode for the self-diagnosis data and the data on Front of the lens
history of use.)
Note5: Setting the Forced MOVIE mode.

2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
button.
The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned
Fig. 6-1-2.
on with the control switch block (PS-CX5500) removed. After
completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced MOVIE mode.
Note6: Exiting the Forced MOVIE mode.

button.
6-5
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT]
DC-IN connector
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
CPC lid
(bottom)
LANC jack
Screw
(M1.7 4),
CPC-8 jig lock ace, p2
(J-6082-388-A)
AC power
adaptor AC IN
Fig. 6-1-3.
6-6
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1-1-3. Precaution
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform
adjustments without loading cassette.
1. MODE dial (PS-CX5500 block) ..................... MOVIE ( ) 8. DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ........................................ OFF
2. NIGHT SHOT (Lens block) ............................................ OFF 9. PROGRAM AE (Menu setting) ................................... AUTO
3. COLOR SLOW S/ SUPER NS ........................................ OFF 10. PICTURE EFECT (Menu setting) ................................... OFF
4. FOCUS (KP-CX5500 block) ................................ MANUAL 11. DIGITAL EFECT (Menu setting) .................................... OFF
5. BACK LIGHT (FB-220 board) ........................................ OFF 12. WHITE BALANCE (Menu setting) ............................ AUTO
6. STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF 13. 16:9 WIDE (Menu setting) .............................................. OFF
7. DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF
2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame )

Electronic beam scanning frame
H
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
C C=D D
Red
Blue
Magenta
Yellow
Green
White
Cyan
Blue
Red
CRT picture frame
V
A B A=B B A
Fig. b (TV monitor picture)
Fig. a Enlargement
(Video output terminal
output waveform)
Difference in level
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to

obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a
B A and the TV monitor display shown in Fig. b.
Fig. 6-1-4.
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-4. (Color reproduction White
adjustment frame)
2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) 841mm
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a Black
clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during
this time.)
3) Flange back adjustment chart
1189mm
Make the chart shown in Fig. 6-1-5 using A0 size (1189mm
841mm) black and white vellum paper.
Fig. 6-1-5.
Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of
the black and white paper joined together are not rough.
6-7
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D, E, F, 1F
PAGE DATA
Note: When reading or writing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address:
10, and set data: 01, then select F page. The 1F page can be chosen
by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
00.
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D PAGE DATA
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
1. Initializing the A, B, C, D Page Data 2. Modification of A, B, C, D Page Data

If the A, B, C or D page data has been initialized, change the data of
Note1: Reading/writing the C page data by using the is
impossible.
the Fixed data-2 address of the initialized page shown in the
Note2: If the B page data has been initialized, the following adjustments following tables by manual input.
need to be performed again.
1) Viewfinder system adjustments Modifying Method:
2) LCD system adjustments 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
3) Video system adjustments data: 01.
Note3: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
the data built in the same model.
Adjusting page A Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
Adjusting Address 10 to FF not operate.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
Adjusting page B
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
Adjusting Address 30 to FF data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
Adjusting page C
Adjusting Address 10 to FF Processing after Completing Modification of A, B, C, D Page data
Adjusting page D Order Page Address Data Procedure
Adjusting Address 10 to 75 1 0 01 00 Set the data.
2 Turn off the power and turn on
Initializing Method: again
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Note: If the following symptoms occur after completing of the
1 0 01 01 Set the data. Modification of A, B, C, D page data, check that the data of the
2 0 10 00 Set the data. Fixed data-2 addresses of A and D page are same as those of the
same model of the same destination.
3 7 03 Set the following data. 1) The self-diagnosis code E:20:00 on the LCD screen is displayed.
00(NTSC), 80(PAL) 2) The power is shut off so that unit cannot operate.
4 7 00 XX Set the data. (Note4)
5 7 01 XX Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. (Note4)
6 7 02 Check that the data changes to
01
7 Perform Modification of A, B,
C, D Page Data.
Note4: XX=20 : Initializing A page

XX=21 : Initializing B page
XX=23 : Initializing D page
XX=24 : Initializing C page
XX=28 : Initializing A, B, C and D page
6-8
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
3. A Page Table 4. B Page Table

Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the A, B, Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the A, B,
C, D Page Data.) C, D Page Data.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of A, B, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of A, B,
C, D Page Data). C, D Page Data).
Address Remark Address Remark

Initial value
00 to 0F 00 to 2F
10 to 17 Fixed data-1 30 Fixed data-2
18 Fixed data-2 31 (Modified data. Copy the data
19 to FF Fixed data-1 32 built in the same model.)
Table. 6-1-2. 33
34 Fixed data-1
35 Fixed data-2
36
37 to 40 Fixed data-1
41 88 S VIDEO out Y level adj.
42 9A S VIDEO out chroma level adj.
43 6E
48 Fixed data-2
49 to 4A Fixed data-1
4B Fixed data-2
4C to 50 Fixed data-1
51 68 VCO adj. (EVF)
52 80
53 Fixed data-1
54 97 RGB AMP adj. (EVF)
55 Fixed data-1
56 8D White balance adj. (EVF)
57 73
58 37 Contrast adj. (EVF)
61 68 VCO adj. (LCD)
62 82
63 A2 V COM adj. (LCD)
64 A3 Bright adj. (LCD)
65 07 Black limit adj. (LCD)
66 3E PSIG GRAY adj. (LCD)
67 7D White balance adj. (LCD)
68 65
69 26 Contrast adj. (LCD)
6A 3D Center level adj. (LCD)
6B to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 6-1-3.
6-9
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5. C Page Table 6. D Page Table

Note1: Reading/writing the C page data by using the is Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
impossible. Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the A, B,
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. C, D Page Data.)
Note3: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the A, B, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of A, B,
C, D Page Data.) C, D Page Data).
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of A, B,
C, D Page Data). Address Remark
Initial value
Address Remark 00 to 0F
10 00 Test mode
00 to 0F
11 Fixed data-1
10 to FF Fixed data-1
12 Fixed data-2
Table. 6-1-4. 13 to 15 Fixed data-1
16 Fixed data-2
19 Fixed data-2
1A to 37 Fixed data-1
38 Fixed data-2
39 to 3E Fixed data-1
3F Fixed data-2
40 to 6E Fixed data-1
6F Fixed data-2
Table. 6-1-5.
6-10
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 1F PAGE DATA 2. Modification of E, F, 1F Page Data

Note: When reading or writing the E, F page data, select page: 0, address: If the E, F, 1F page data has been initialized, change the data of the
10, and set data: 00. Fixed data-2 address shown in the following table by manual input.
When reading or writing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address:
Modifying Method:
by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
00. data: 01.
2) When changing the E, F page data, select page: 0, address: 10,
1. Initializing the E, F, 1F Page Data and set data: 00.
Note1: If Initializing the E, F, 1F Page Data is performed, all data of the 3) When changing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address: 10,
E page, F page and 1F page will be initialized. (It is impossible to and set data: 01.
initialize a single page.) After completing the modification of 1F page data, reset the
Note2: If the E, F, 1F page data has been initialized, following adjustments data of this address to 00.
need to be performed again. 4) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
1) Modification of E, F, 1F page data
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
2) Camera system adjustments
Note3: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 the data built in the same model.
PAL model: DCR-DVD100E Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
not operate.
5) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
Adjusting page E adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
Adjusting Address 00 to FF data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
Adjusting page F 6) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value.
If not, change the data to the initial value.
Adjusting Address 10 to FF
Adjusting page 1F Processing after Completing Modification of E, F, 1F Page data
Adjusting Address 00 to F7 Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 10 00 Set the data.
Initializing Method:
3 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 Perform 36MHz Origin Osc.
3 6 01 Set the following data, and press Adjustment of the camera system
PAUSE button. adjustment.
2D (NTSC), 2F (PAL)
4 6 03 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE 3. E Page Table
button. Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the E, F, 1F
Page Data.)
01. Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of E, F,
6 Perform Modification of E, F, 1F Page Data).
1F Page Data.
Address Remark
14 Fixed data-2
15 Fixed data-1
16 Fixed data-2
17
27 Fixed data-2
28 to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 6-1-6.
6-11
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4. F Page Table
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Address Initial value Remark
Page Data.) NTSC PAL
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of E, F, 46 FF FF Optical axis adj.
1F Page Data). 47 to 4B Fixed data-1
4C 19 19 HALL adj.
Address Initial value Remark 4D to 4F Fixed data-1
NTSC PAL 50 80 80 Mechanical shutter adj.
00 to 0F 51 80 80
10 80 80 36MHz origin osc. adj. 52 80 80
11 to 12 Fixed data-1 53 80 80
13 81 81 HALL adj. 54 80 80
14 5D 5D 55 80 80
15 88 88 56 40 40
16 Fixed data-1 57 00 00
17 9A 9A MAX GAIN adj. 58 34 34
18 80 80 LV standard data input 59 00 00
19 91 7A 5A 30 30
1A 1B 1B AWB standard data input 5B 00 00
1B 00 00 5C 2A 2A
1C 07 07 5D 00 00
1D 00 00 5E 14 14
1E 0E 0E Auto white balance adj. 5F 00 00
1F 00 00 60 70 70
20 0D 0D 61 80 80
21 00 00 62 80 80
22 Fixed data-1 63 80 80
23 22 22 Color reproduction adj. 64 80 80
24 Fixed data-1 65 1E 1E
25 27 24 Color reproduction adj. 66 to 83 Fixed data-1
26 to 29 Fixed data-1 84 Fixed data-2
2A 00 00 Color reproduction adj. 85
2B F1 EF 86 to 89 Fixed data-1
2E to 31 Fixed data-1 8A Fixed data-2
2E 2B 2A Auto white balance adj. 8B
2F C0 40 8C to 8D Fixed data-1
30 59 58 8E Fixed data-2
31 00 C0 8F to 90 Fixed data-1
32 19 19 Flange back adj. 91 Fixed data-2
33 51 51 92 (Modified data. Copy the data
34 20 20 93 built in the same model.)
35 22 22 94 Fixed data-1
36 13 13 95 Fixed data-2
37 93 93 96 to 9D Fixed data-1
38 00 00 9E Fixed data-2
39 00 00 9F Fixed data-1
3A 00 00 A0 Fixed data-2
3B 00 00 A1 to A3 Fixed data-1
3C 46 46 A4 Fixed data-2
3D 19 19 A5 to A6 Fixed data-1
3E 00 00 A7 Fixed data-2
3F 2A 2A A8 (Modified data. Copy the data
40 00 00 A9 built in the same model.)
41 00 00 AA
42 00 00 AB Fixed data-1
43 to 45 Fixed data-1 AC Fixed data-2
6-12
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
F Page
5. 1F Page Table
Note1: When reading or writing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address:
Address Initial value Remark
NTSC PAL by this data setting.
AD to B6 Fixed data-1 After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
B7 Fixed data-2 00.
B8 Page Data.)
B9 to BC Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of E, F,
BD Fixed data-2 1F Page Data).
BE
Address Remark
BF
C0 to C5 Fixed data-1 00 to 74 Fixed data-1
C6 Fixed data-2 75 Fixed data-2
C7 (Modified data. Copy the data 76 to D6 Fixed data-1
C8 built in the same model.) D7 Fixed data-2
C9 to CD Fixed data-1 D8 to F7 Fixed data-1
CE Fixed data-2 Table. 6-1-8.
CF
D0 to E3 Fixed data-1
E4 Fixed data-2
E5
E6 Fixed data-1
E7 Fixed data-2
E8 to EF Fixed data-1
F0 Fixed data-2
F1 (Modified data. Copy the data
F2 built in the same model.)
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
Table. 6-1-7.
6-13
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. HALL Adjustment

Before perform the camera system adjustments (except for 36MHz
Origin Oscillation Adjustment), check that the specified values of For detecting the position of the lens iris and ND filter, adjust AMP
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS are satisfied. gain and offset.
And check that the data of page: 0, address: 10 is 00. If not, set Subject Not required
data: 00 to this address. Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1)
1. 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
(VC-307 board) Adjustment Page F
Set the frequency of the clock for synchronization. Adjustment Address 13, 14, 15, 4C
If deviated, the synchronization will be disrupted and the color will Specified Value 1 15 to 19
become inconsistent.
Specified Value 2 88 to 8C
Subject Not required
Measurement Point Pin qs of IC1301 Note1: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter 1 : 00 : XX
IRIS display data
Adjustment Page F Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Adjustment Address 10 Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Specified Value f=18000000 90Hz
Switch setting:
MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( )
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
2 F 10 Change the data and set the
frequency (f) to the specified 2 6 94 17 Set the data.
value. 3 6 95 8A Set the data.
3 F 10 Press PAUSE button. 4 6 01 6D Set the data, and press PAUSE
4 0 01 00 Set the data. button.
01. (Note4)
VC-307 BOARD (SIDE B)
button.
24 13 Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:

25 12 13, 14, 15, 4C.
IC1301
36 1
37 48
Checking method:
button.
3 1 Check that the IRIS display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value 1.
Fig. 6-1-6.
button.
5 1 Check that the IRIS display data
value 2.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:

button.
6-14
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
3. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box)

The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing.
Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for
the minipattern box (Note1)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 32 to 42
Note1: Dark Siemens star chart.

Note2: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of HALL
Adjustment.
Note3: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment.
Note5: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, turn off
the power and turn on again.
Switch setting:
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( )
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Preparations: Adjusting method:

1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following
figure.
Note: The attachment lenses are not used. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and 2 6 48 01 Set the data.
the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm. 3 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
3) Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal. button. (Note3)
4) Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is
the specified voltage.
button.
5) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end,
the center of the Siemens star chart and center of the exposure 5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
screen coincide. 01. (Note6)
Specified voltage: Note6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
The specified voltage varies according to the minipattern box, so 32 to 42.
adjust the power supply output voltage to the specified voltage
written on the sheet which is supplied with the minipattern box. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Below 3 cm 1 6 48 00 Set the data.
Minipattern box
again.
Camcorder
4 Perform Flange Back Check.
Camera
table
Regulated power supply

Output voltage : Specified voltage 0.01Vdc
Output current : more than 3.5A
Red (+)
Black ()
Yellow (SENS +)
White (SENS ) Need not connected

Black (GND)
Fig. 6-1-7.
6-15
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4. Flange Back Adjustment

(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject
More Than 500m Away)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing.
4-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) 4-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)
Subject Flange back adjustment chart Perform this adjustment after performing Flange Back Adjustment
(2.0 m from the front of the protection (1).
glass) Subject Subject more than 500m away
(Luminance: 350 50 lux) (Subjects with clear contrast such as
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander buildings, etc.)
Adjustment Page F Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor
Adjustment Address 32 to 42 Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page F
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of HALL Adjustment Address 32 to 42
Adjustment.
Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, turn off
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00, turn off the
the power and turn on again.
power and turn on again.
Switch setting: Switch setting:

1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( )
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Preparations: Preparations:
1) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end, 1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is
the center of the chart for the flange back adjustment and center more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as
of the exposure screen coincide. building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should
not be in the screen.)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 6 48 01 Set the data. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
3 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE 2 6 48 01 Set the data.
button. (Note2) 3 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
4 6 01 15 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note2)
button. 4 Place a ND filter on the lens so
5 6 02 Check that the data changes to that the optimum image is obtain.
01. (Note5) 5 6 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
32 to 42. 6 6 02 Check that the data changes to
01. (Note4)
Order Page Address Data Procedure 32 to 42.
again. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
2 Perform Flange Back Order Page Address Data Procedure
Adjustment (2) 1 6 48 00 Set the data.
again.
4 Perform Flange Back Check
6-16
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5. Flange Back Check

Subject Siemens star
(2.0 m from the front of the lens)
(Luminance : approx. 200 lux)
Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor
Measuring Instrument
Specified Value Focused at the TELE end and WIDE
end.
Switch setting:
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( )
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Note2: When the auto focus is ON, the lens can be checked if it is focused
or not by observing the data on the page 1 of the adjustment remote
commander.
1) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 0F.
2) Page 1 shows the state of the focus.
1 : 00 : XX
Odd: Focused
Even: Unfocused
Checking method:
3) Place the Siemens star 2.0m from the front of the lens.
4) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the
Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image.
5) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
6) Turn on the auto focus.
7) Check that the lens is focused (Note2).
9) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
10) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused.

6-17
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
6. Optical Axis Adjustment

Align the lens Optical Axis with that of the CCD imager. If deviated,
center of picture can lose focus when zoom is operated from the
WIDE end to the TELE end.
Subject Siemens star
Measurement Point Check on the monitor TV
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 46
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Flange

back adjustment.
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 48 is 00. If not, set data: Correction data
00 to this address. Area Display phase
(Page: F, address: 46)
Note4: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100
1 22.6 to 67.5 01
2 67.6 to 112.5 02
Switch setting: 3 112.6 to 157.5 03
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) 4 157.6 to 202.5 04
2) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 5 202.6to 247.5 05
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF 6 247.6 to 292.5 06
7 292.6 to 337.5 07
Preparations before adjustments:
1) Connect a DV camcorder to the monitor TV. 8 337.6 to 22.5 08
2) Playback the monoscope segment of the DV system check tape
(XH5-5 (NTSC), XH5-5P (PAL),).
3) Attach the optical axis frame chart (transparent) on the monitor Table 6-1-9.
TV screen. Center of monoscope image and that of optical axis
frame must be agree. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
4) Disconnect the DV camcorder from the monitor TV, and 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
connect the DVD camcorder to the monitor TV.
Adjusting method:
2) Select page: F, address: 46, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button.
3) Place the Siemens star 2.0 m away from the front of the lens.
5) Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the
Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame.
7) Measure on the monitor TV screen in which area of the optical
axis frame the center of the Siemens star is located. Measure
the amount of displacement (distance between the center of
the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis frame.) The
measurement value is named L1.
8) Read the correction data corresponding to the area from Table
6-1-9.
9) Input the correction data to page: F, address: 46, and press the
PAUSE button
11) Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the
Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame.
Fig. 6-1-8.
13) Measure the amount of displacement (distance between the
center of the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis
frame.) The measurement value is named L2.
14) Compare the values L1 and L2, and confirm that L2 is smaller
than L1. If L2 is lager than L1, select page: F, address: 46, set
data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
6-18
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 50 to 65

Adjusting method:
2) Input the following data to page: F, addresses: 50 to 65.
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander
each time to set the data.
Data
Address
NTSC PAL
50 80 80
51 80 80
52 80 80
53 80 80
54 80 80
55 80 80
56 40 40
57 00 00
58 34 34
59 00 00
5A 30 30
5B 00 00
5C 2A 2A
5D 00 00
5E 14 14
5F 00 00
60 70 70
61 80 80
62 80 80
63 80 80
64 80 80
65 1E 1E
6-19
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
8. Picture Frame Setting

Subject Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
(1.5m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO/
VIDEO jack
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F
Note1: The following adjustments should be carried out upon completion

of Flange back adjustment and Optical Axis Adjustment.
Check on the oscilloscope
Switch setting:
1. Horizontal period
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( )
A=B C=D
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL B C
4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF
A D
5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF
Setting method:
2) Adjust the zoom and the camera direction, and set to the
specified position.
3) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display,
and adjust the picture frame to this position in following
adjustments using Color reproduction adjustment frame.
Processing after Completing Camera System Adjustments:

After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data
settings.
Fig. 6-1-9.
2. Vertical period
E E=F F
Fig. 6-1-10.
Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
Color bar chart picture frame Monitor TV picture frame
Fig. 6-1-11.
6-20
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
9. Color Reproduction Adjustment

Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color
reproduction is produced.
Subject Color bar chart
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack
For NTSC model
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 23, 25, 2A, 2B
Specified Value All color luminance points should settle
within each color reproduction frame.
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Flange

back adjustment and Optical Axis Adjustment.
Switch setting:
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) Burst position
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL
For PAL model
Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Burst position
3) Select page: 6, address: 9D, and set data: 25.
4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3D, and press the PAUSE
button.
5) Select page: F, address: 80, set the following data, and press
the PAUSE button.
37 (NTSC), B7 (PAL)
6) Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope, and adjust
the burst luminance point to the burst position of the color
reproduction frame.
7) Change the data of page: F, address: 23, 25, 2A and 2B, and
settle each color luminance point in each color reproduction
frame.
Note: Be sure to press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander before changing the addresses. If not, the new data
will not be written to the memory.
Fig. 6-1-12.
1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button.
3) Select page: 6, address: 9D, and set data: 00.
6-21
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
10. MAX GAIN Adjustment 11. LV Standard Data Input

Setting the minimum illumination. And adjust the normal coefficient of the light value.
If it is not consistent, the image level required for taking subjects in Subject Clear chart
low illuminance will not be produced (dark). (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Subject Clear chart Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note4)
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 18, 19
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Flange Specified Value 0FB0 to 1050
back adjustment and Optical Axis Adjustment.
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Flange
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page: back adjustment, Optical Axis Adjustment, Color reproduction
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. adjustment and MAX GAIN Adjustment.
Switch setting: Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page:
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) Note4: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 1 : XX : XX
3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL Display data
5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF Switch setting:
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( )
Adjusting method: 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Order Page Address Data Procedure 3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF
3 6 2C 01 Set the data. Adjusting method:
4 6 96 Set the following data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
28 (NTSC), 1C (PAL)
5 6 97 Set the following data.
80 (NTSC), 00 (PAL)
3 6 01 0D Set the data, and press PAUSE
6 6 01 6F Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
button.
01. (Note5)
01. (Note4)
5 0 03 1E Set the data.
Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 6 1 Check that the display data
17. (Note5) satisfies the specified
value.
Processing after Completing Adjustments
Order Page Address Data Procedure Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
18, 19.
1 6 2C 00 Set the data.
2 6 48 00 Set the data. Processing after Completing Adjustments
4 6 97 00 Set the data. 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
5 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button. 2 6 48 00 Set the data.
5 Perform Auto White Balance
Standard Data Input.
6-22
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame) 13. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input
When performing Auto White Balance Standard Data Input, Auto Adjust the white balance reference at 3200K.
White Balance Adjustment and White Balance Check, set the Subject Clear chart (All white frame) (Note4)
picture frame to All white frame.
Adjustment Page F
Subject Clear chart (All white frame)
Adjustment Address 1A to 1D
(1.5m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Color
Measuring Instrument TV monitor (Under scan mode) Reproduction Adjustment.
Specified Value Whole of the screen is white Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page:
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note4: Perform 12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame) before
this adjustment.
Switch setting:
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) Switch setting:
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( )
3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL
5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF
Setting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method:
2 6 90 2D Set the data. 1 6 48 02 Set the data.
3 6 91 03 Set the data. 2 Check that the whole of the screen
4 6 92 8E Set the data. is white. If not, perform 12.
Picture Frame Setting (All White
5 6 93 26 Set the data. Frame).
6 6 01 79 Set the data, and press PAUSE 3 0 01 01 Set the data.
button.
4 Wait for more than 2 sec.
7 Check that the whole of the
screen is white.
button.
8 Perform the following adjustments.
6 6 01 0B Set the data, and press PAUSE
Processing after Completing Adjustments button.
After completing Auto White Balance Standard Data Input, Auto 7 6 02 Check that the data changes to
White Balance Adjustment and White Balance Check, release 01. (Note5)
the data setting. 8 Perform Auto White Balance
Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjustment.
2 6 90 00 Set the data. 1A to 1D.
6-23
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
14. Auto White Balance Adjustment Adjusting method:

Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will
be poor.
2 Check that the whole of the screen
Subject Clear chart (All white frame)
is white. If not, perform 12.
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature Picture Frame Setting (All White
correction Frame).
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note3) 3 Place the C14 filter for color
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander temperature correction on the lens.
Adjustment Page F 4 0 01 01 Set the data.
Adjustment Address 1E to 21, 2E to 31 5 F 2E Set the following data, and press
Specified Value R ratio : 2B80 to 2C00 (NTSC) PAUSE button.
2B80 to 2C00 (PAL) 2B (NTSC), 2B (PAL)
B ratio : 58C0 to 5940 (NTSC) 6 F 2F Set the following data, and press
58C0 to 5940 (PAL) PAUSE button.
C0 (NTSC), C0 (PAL)
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Auto 7 F 30 Set the following data, and press
White Balance Standard Data Input. PAUSE button.
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. 59 (NTSC), 59 (PAL)
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. 8 F 31 Set the following data, and press
Note4: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. PAUSE button.
1 : XX : XX 00 (NTSC), 00 (PAL)
Display data 9 6 01 83 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Note5: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 button.
Switch setting: button.
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) 11 6 02 Check that the data changes to
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 01. (Note6)
3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL 12 6 01 3F Set the data, and press PAUSE
4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF button.
5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF 13 0 03 04 Set the data.
14 1 Check that the display data
(Note4) satisfies the R ratio
specified value.
(Note4) satisfies the B ratio
specified value.

1E to 21, 2E to 31.

button.
9 Perform White Balance Check.
6-24
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
15. White Balance Check Processing after Completing Adjustments

Subject Clear chart (All white frame) (Note2) Order Page Address Data Procedure
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
correction button.
ND filter 1.0 and 0.4 and 0.1 2 6 48 00 Set the data.
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack 3 6 90 00 Set the data.
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope 4 6 91 00 Set the data.
Specified Value Fig. 6-1-13. A to B 5 6 92 00 Set the data.
Note2: Perform 12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame). 7 0 03 00 Set the data.
Switch setting:
1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( )
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Checking method:
Indoor white balance check
1 Check that the lens is not covered
with either filter.
R-Y 2mm
button.
4 Check that the center of the white B-Y
luminance point is within the
circle shown Fig. 6-1-13. A.
5 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 2mm
button.
Outdoor white balance check Fig. 6-1-13 (A).
6 Place the C14 filter on the lens.
button. R-Y
1mm
8 Check that the center of the
white luminance point is within
B-Y
the circle shown Fig. 6-1-13. B. 0.5mm
9 Remove the C14 filter. 3mm
LV data check
10 Place the ND filter 1.5 3mm
(1.0+0.1+0.4) on the lens.
11 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE Fig. 6-1-13 (B).
button.
value.
Specified value: 8000 to 8BC0
Note3: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.

1 : XX : XX
Display data
6-25
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
16. Steady Shot Check
Precautions on the Parts Replacement

There are two types of repair parts.
Type A: ENC03MA
Type B: ENC03MB
Replace the broken sensor with a same type sensor. If replace with
other type parts, the image will vibrate up and down or left and
right during hand-shake correction operations.
Precautions on Angular Velocity Sensor

The sensor incorporates a precision oscillator. Handle it with care
as if it dropped, the balance of the oscillator will be disrupted and
operations will not be performed properly.
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1)
Specified Value 2B00 to 4B00
Note1: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.

1 : XX : XX
Display data
Switch setting:
1) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ....................................... ON
2) ZOOM .................................................................... TELE end
Adjusting method:
Pitch sensor check
(MA-420 board SE5502)
value. (Note3)
Yaw sensor check
(MA-420 board SE5501)
value. (Note3)
6 Move the camcorder, and check
that the steady shot operations
have been performed normally
Note3: Dont move the camcoder.
6-26
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-4. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM

ADJUSTMENT
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages

caused by static electricity.
Note2: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0,
Note3: As the PANEL CLOSE switch is attached to the cabinet (R), this
cabinet must be attached when performing adjustments.
If you perform the adjustments with cabinet (R) removed, set the
following data.
2) Select page: 3, address: 02, set data: 02, and press PAUSE button.
Reset the data after completing adjustment.
1) Select page: 3, address: 00, and set data: 00. Remove the CPC lid (bottom).
2) Select page: 3, address: 02, set data: 00, and press PAUSE button.
Switch setting:
LCD panel .................................................................... Closed
[Adjusting connector]
Most of the measuring points for adjusting the viewfinder system
are concentrated in CN1003 of VC-307 board.
Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388-
A).
The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN1003.
Pin No.
19 1
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name
1 GND 2 GND
3 PANEL VG 4 H START
20 2
5 XHD/PSIG 6 EVF VG
7 EVF VCO 8 EVF BL
9 D 3.1V 10 LANC SIG
11 MS XIN 12 MS DIO
13 MS BS 14 MS VCC ON Fig. 6-1-14.
15 MS SCLK 16 ACCESS LED
17 C PIO5 18 C PIO4
19 S TXD 20 S RXD
Table 6-1-10.
6-27
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1. VCO Adjustment (VC-307 board)

Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the EVF screen will be
blurred.
Mode MOVIE ( )
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Pin 7 of CN1003 (EVF VCO)
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
Adjustment Page B
Specified Value f = 15734 30Hz (NTSC)
f = 15625 30Hz (PAL)

Note2: Refer to Table 6-3-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table.
Adjusting method for NTSC model: Adjusting method for PAL model:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 B 51 Change the data and set the VCO 2 B 52 Change the data and set the VCO
frequency (f) to the specified frequency (f) to the specified
value. value.
3 B 51 Press PAUSE button. 3 B 52 Press PAUSE button.
4 B 51 Read the data, and this data is 4 B 52 Read the data, and this data is
named D51. named D52.
5 Convert D51 to decimal notation, 5 Convert D52 to decimal notation,
and obtain D51. (Note2) and obtain D52. (Note2)
6 Calculate D52 using following 6 Calculate D51 using following
equations (Decimal calculation) equations (Decimal calculation)
When D51 231 When D52 24
D52 = D51 + 24 D51 = D52 24
When D51 > 231 When D52 < 24
D52 = 255 D51 = 0
7 Convert D 52 to a hexadecimal 7 Convert D51 to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain D52. (Note2) number, and obtain D51. (Note2)
8 B 52 D52 Set the data, and press PAUSE 8 B 51 D51 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
6-28
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2. RGB AMP Adjustment (VC-307 board) 3. Contrast Adjustment (VC-307 board)

Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
or saturated (whitish). (whitish).
Mode MOVIE ( ) Mode MOVIE ( )
Subject Arbitrary Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Pin 6 of CN1003 (EVF VG) Measurement Point Pin 6 of CN1003 (EVF VG)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page B Adjustment Page B
Adjustment Address 54 Adjustment Address 58
Specified Value A = 7.20 0.10V Specified Value A = 2.50 0.10V
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Adjusting method: Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 B 54 Change the data and set the 2 B 58 Change the data and set the
voltage (A) between the reversed voltage (A) between the 100 IRE
waveform pedestal and non- and 0 IRE (pedestal) to the
reversed waveform pedestal to the specified value. (The data should
specified value. be 00 to 7F.)
3 B 54 Press PAUSE button. 3 B 58 Press PAUSE button.
Pedestal
A 100 IRE
2H
2H
Pedestal
Pedestal
Fig. 6-1-15. Fig. 6-1-16.
6-29
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4. White Balance Adjustment (VC-307 board)

Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the reproduction of the EVF screen may degenerate.
Mode MOVIE ( )
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Check on EVF screen
Adjustment Page B
Specified Value The EVF screen should not be colored.
Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC2201
Adjusting method:
2 B 56 8D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 B 57 73 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 B 57 Check that the EVF screen is not
colored. If not colored, proceed to
step 10.
5 B 56 Change the data so that the EVF
screen is not colored.
6 B 56 Press PAUSE button.
7 B 57 Change the data so that the EVF
9 B 57 If the EVF screen is colored,
repeat steps 5 to 9.
6-30
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 1. VCO Adjustment (PD-188 board)

Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will
Note1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high voltage AC be blurred.
power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back light holder to Mode MOVIE ( )
avoid electrical shock.
Note2: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages Subject Arbitrary
caused by static electricity. Measurement Point Pin 4 of CN1003 of VC-307 board
Note3: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0, (H START)
Note4: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
PAL model: DCR-DVD100E Adjustment Page B
Switch setting:
LCD panel ............................................................................. Open Specified Value f = 15734 30Hz (NTSC)
f = 15625 30Hz (PAL)
[Adjusting connector]
Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are Note2: Refer to Table 6-3-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table.
concentrated in CN1003 of the VC-307 board. Connect the
measuring instruments via the multi CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388-A). The Adjusting method for NTSC model:
following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN1003. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
1 GND 2 GND 2 B 61 Change the data and set the VCO
3 PANEL VG 4 H START frequency (f) to the specified
value.
5 XHD/PSIG 6 EVF VG
7 EVF VCO 8 EVF BL 3 B 61 Press PAUSE button.
9 D 3.1V 10 LANC SIG 4 B 61 Read the data, and this data is
named D61.
11 MS XIN 12 MS DIO
13 MS BS 14 MS VCC ON 5 Convert D61 to decimal notation,
and obtain D61. (Note2)
15 MS SCLK 16 ACCESS LED
6 Calculate D62 using following
17 C PIO5 18 C PIO4
equations (Decimal calculation)
19 S TXD 20 S RXD When D61 229
D62 = D61 + 26
Table 6-1-11.
When D61 > 229
D62 = 255
Remove the CPC lid (bottom).
7 Convert D62 to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain D62. (Note2)
8 B 62 D62 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Adjusting method for PAL model:

2 B 62 Change the data and set the VCO
frequency (f) to the specified
value.
19 1 3 B 62 Press PAUSE button.
4 B 62 Read the data, and this data is
named D62.
5 Convert D62 to decimal notation,
20 2
and obtain D62. (Note2)
6 Calculate D61 using following
equations (Decimal calculation)
Fig. 6-1-17. When D62 26
D61 = D62 26
When D62 < 26
D61 = 0
7 Convert D61 to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain D61. (Note2)
8 B 61 D61 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
6-31
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2. Bright Adjustment (PD-188 board) 3. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-188 board)

Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the Set the video signal level for driving the LCD driver to an appropriate
specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish level.
or saturated (whitish). Mode MOVIE ( )
Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Arbitrary
Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 5 of CN1003 of VC-307 board
Measurement Point Pin 3 of CN1003 of VC-307 board (PSIG)
(PANEL VG) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page B
Adjustment Page B Adjustment Address 65
Adjustment Address 64 Specified Value A = 8.30 0.08V
Specified Value A = 7.58 0.05V (NTSC)
A = 7.46 0.05V (PAL) Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Adjusting method:

Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 65 Change the data and set the PSIG
signal amplitude (A) to the
2 B 64 Change the data and set the specified value. (The data should
voltage (A) between the reversed be 00 to 0F)
waveform pedestal and non-
reversed waveform pedestal to the 3 B 65 Press PAUSE button.
specified value. 4 0 01 00 Set the data.
Pedestal
Fig. 6-1-19.
A
2H
Pedestal
Fig. 6-1-18.
6-32
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4. PSIG GLAY Adjustment (PD-188 board) 5. Contrast Adjustment (PD-188 board)

Set the PSIG signal level to an appropriate level. Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
Mode MOVIE ( ) value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
(whitish).
Subject Arbitrary
Mode MOVIE ( )
Measurement Point Pin 5 of CN1003 of VC-307 board
(PSIG) Subject Arbitrary
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measurement Point Pin 3 of CN1003 of VC-307 board
(PANEL VG)
Adjustment Page B
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page B
Specified Value A = 5.00 0.05V
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Specified Value A = 2.60 0.05V (NTSC)
A = 2.58 0.05V (PAL)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Adjusting method:
2 B 66 Change the data and set the PSIG
signal level (A) to the specified
value. (The data should be 00 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
to 7F.) 2 B 69 Change the data and set the
3 B 66 Press PAUSE button. voltage (A) between the 100 IRE
and 0 IRE (pedestal) to the
specified value. (The data should
be 00 to 7F.)
5 Check that the specified value of
Bright Adjustment is satisfied. If
not, perform Bright Adjustment.
2H
100 IRE
Fig. 6-1-20.
2H
Pedestal
Fig. 6-1-21.
6-33
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
6. Center Level Adjustment (PD-188 board) 7. V COM Adjustment (PD-188 board)

Set the video signal center level of LCD panel to an appropriate Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the
level. specified value.
Mode MOVIE ( ) If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and
conspicuous vertical lines.
Subject Arbitrary
Mode MOVIE ( )
Measurement Point Pin 3 of CN1003 of VC-307 board
(PANEL VG) Subject Arbitrary
Measuring Instrument Digital voltmeter Measurement Point Check on LCD display
Adjustment Page B Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Address 6A Adjustment Page B
Specified Value A = 7.00 0.03Vdc Adjustment Address 63
Specified Value The brightness difference between the
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. section A and section B is minimum.
Adjusting method: Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of the
Order Page Address Data Procedure following adjustments.
Bright Adjustment
1 0 01 01 Set the data. Black Limit Adjustment
2 B 6A Change the data and set the DC Contrast Adjustment
voltage (A) to the specified value. Center Level Adjustment
(The data should be 00 to 7F.)
3 B 6A Press PAUSE button. Adjusting method:
2 B 63 Change the data so that the
brightness of the section A and
that of the section B is equal.
(Note3)
3 B 63 Subtract 2 from the data. (Note3)
Note3: The data should be 80 to BF.
B A
A B
B A
A B
Fig. 6-1-22.
6-34
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
8. White Balance Adjustment (PD-188 board)

Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the reproduction of the LCD screen may degenerate.
Mode MOVIE ( )
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Check on LCD screen
Adjustment Page B
Specified Value The LCD screen should not be colored.
Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC6001
Adjusting method:
2 B 67 7D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 B 68 65 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 B 68 Check that the LCD screen is not
colored. If not colored, proceed to
step 10.
5 B 67 Change the data so that the LCD
7 B 68 Change the data so that the LCD
9 B 68 If the LCD screen is colored,
repeat steps 5 to 9.
6-35
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
6-2. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT

2-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS
Use the following measuring instruments for video section

adjustments.
2-1-1. Equipment to Required
1) TV monitor
2) Oscilloscope (dual-phenomenon, band width above 30 MHz
with delay mode) (Unless specified otherwise, use a 10:1
probe.)
3) Frequency counter
4) Pattern generator with video output terminal
5) Audio generator
6) Audio level meter
7) Audio distortion meter
8) Audio attenuator
9) Adjustment remote commander (J-6082-053-B)
10) Extension cable (100P 0.5mm) (J-6082-352-A)
For extension between the MD-097 board (CN4902) and the
VC-307 board (CN1008)
11) CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388-A)
6-36
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
2-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting Note2: Setting the Forced PLAY mode (PLAY/EDIT mode)
Note1: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0, 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
address: 10 is 00. If not, set data: 00 to this address. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE
1) The adjustments of this unit are performed in the PLAY mode button of the adjusting remote commander.
or MOVIE mode. The above procedure will enable the power to be turned on with the
To set to the PLAY mode, set the mode dial to PLAY/EDIT control switch block (PS-CX5500 block) removed.
( ) or set the Forced PLAY mode using the adjusting After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced PLAY
remote commander (Note2). mode.
To set to the MOVIE mode, set the mode dial to MOVIE
Note3: Setting the Forced MOVIE mode
( ) or set the Forced MOVIE mode using the adjusting 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
remote commander (Note3). 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced button of the adjusting remote commander.
MOVIE Mode or Forced Camera Power ON Mode. (Note5) The above procedure will enable the power to be turned on with the
2) The front panel block (Microphones, MA-420 board (S VIDEO control switch block (PS-CX5500 block) removed.
jack, remote commander receiver, infrared LED, angular After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced MOVIE
velocity sensors)) need not be connected except for the case mode.
that the S VIDEO jack is used. To remove it, disconnect the
following connector. Note4: Setting the Forced STILL mode
MA-420 board CN5503 (22P, 0.5mm) 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
3) Cabinet (R) (CK-127 board, LCD block) need not be connected.
button of the adjusting remote commander.
But removing the cabinet (R) (disconnecting the VC-307 board
The above procedure will enable the memory power to be turned on
CN1007) means removing the lithium 3V power supply (CK-
with the control switch block (PS-CX5500 block) removed.
127 board, BT5201), data such as date, time, user-set menus
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced STILL
will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data.
mode.
But, the self-diagnosis data and the data on history of use (user
initial power on date, final condensation occurrence data) will Note5: Exiting the Forced mode
be kept even if the cabinet (R) has been removed. (Refer to 6- 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
3.Service Mode for the data on the history use and the self- 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
diagnosis data.) button of the adjusting remote commander.
To remove the cabinet (R), disconnect the following connectors. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
VC-307 board CN1007 (39P, 0.3mm)
4) The EVF block (LB-084 board) need not be connected. To
remove it, disconnect the following connector.
VC-307 board CN2201 (20P, 0.5mm)
5) The intelligent accessory shoe need not be connected. To
remove it, disconnect the following connector.
VC-307 board CN1001 (10P, 0.5mm)
6) The lens block (CD-428 board) need not be connected. To
remove it, disconnect the following connectors.
VC-307 board CN1301 (24P, 0.5mm)
VC-307 board CN1201 (24P, 0.5mm)
VC-307 board CN1010 (2P, 0.8mm)
7) By setting the Forced PLAY mode or the Forced MOVIE
mode, the video section can be operate even if the control
switch block (PS-CX5500) has been removed. When removing
it, disconnect the following connector.
VC-307 board CN1002 (14P, 0.5mm)
8) To open the VC-307 board, use the following extension cable
between the VC-307 board CN1008 and MD-097 board
CN4901.
J-6082-352-A (100P, 0.5mm)
6-37
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-1-3. Adjusting Connectors

The checkpoints of the base unit are concentrated at CN4902 of
MD-097 board. When using an oscilloscope, connect it via the CPC-
8 jig (J-6082-388-A). The following table lists the pin numbers and
signal names of CN4902.
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name
1 MON9 2 DSU/RXD3 CN4902
20 19
3 VRD 4 TXD3
5 PLCK 6 RXD0
7 REG GND 8 TXD0 2 1
9 XCS DD 10 XHELIO_RESET
11 HI EVER SO 12 TEST FE0
13 HI EVER SCK 14 TEST RFOP
15 P97 16 JIG UNREG
17 TEST TE0 18 TEST RFON
19 REG GND 20 VTR CAM DD ON
Note: Playback RF signal : Pins qf, qk Remove the CPC lid (BT).
Focus error signal : Pin qs
Tracking error signal : Pin qj Fig 6-2-1.
Table 6-2-1.
2-1-4. Connecting the Equipment

Connect the measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 6-2-2, and
perform the adjustments.
Recording mode
Pattern generator AUDIO/VIDEO jack
VIDEO
Video output (Yellow)
(75 )
AUDIO L
(White)
Main unit
AUDIO R
(Red)
LANC jack
Adjustment
remote
commander Adjustment
remote
Playback mode commander
LANC jack
TV monitor
VIDEO
(Yellow)
Main unit
AUDIO L (White)
AUDIO R (Red)
AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Fig 6-2-2.
6-38
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
2-1-5. Input/Output Level and Impedance

Video input/output
Special stereo mini jack
Video signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 unbalanced,
sync negative
S video input/output
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal : 1 Vp-p, 75 unbalanced,
sync negative
Chrominance signal : 0.286 Vp-p, 75 unbalanced (NTSC)
: 0.300 Vp-p, 75 unbalanced (PAL)
Audio input/output
Special stereo mini jack
Input level : 327 mV
Input impedance : More than 47 k
Output level : 327 mV (at load impedance 47 k
Output impedance : Below 2.2 k
6-39
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
2-2. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment (VC-307 Board)
Note1: efore perform the video system adjustments, check that the Mode MOVIE ( )
specified value of 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment of
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT is satisfied. Subject Arbitrary
And check that the data of page: 0, address: 10 is 00. If not, set Measurement Point Chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO
data: 00 to this address. jack (75 terminated)
Note2: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 External trigger: Y signal terminal of
S VIDEO jack
1. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-307 Board) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Mode MOVIE ( ) Adjustment Page B
Subject Arbitrary Adjustment Address 42, 43
Measurement Point Y signal terminal of S VIDEO jack Specified Value Cr level : A = 714 14mV (NTSC)
(75 terminated) A = 700 14mV (PAL)
Cb level : B = 714 14mV (NTSC)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope B = 700 14mV (PAL)
Adjustment Page B Burst level : C = 286 6mV (NTSC)
Adjustment Address 41 C = 300 6mV (PAL)
Specified Value A = 1000 14mV Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Switch setting:
Switch setting: DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ........................................ OFF
DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ........................................ OFF Adjusting method:
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 3 00 00 Set the data. 3 3 04 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE
3 3 04 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button. 4 B 42 Change the data and set the Cr
4 B 41 Change the data and set the Y signal level (A) to the specified
signal level (A) to the specified value.
value. 5 B 42 Press PAUSE button.
5 B 41 Press PAUSE button. 6 B 43 Change the data and set the Cb
6 3 04 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE signal level (B) to the specified
button. value.
7 0 01 00 Set the data. 7 B 43 Press PAUSE button.
button.
9 Check that the burst signal level
(C) is satisfied the specified value.
A
C
Fig. 6-2-3.
A B
0.28 sec (NTSC) 0.28 sec (NTSC)

0.23 sec (PAL) 0.23 sec (PAL)
Fig. 6-2-4.
6-40
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
3. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-307 Board)

Mode MOVIE ( )
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO VIDEO
jack (75 terminated)
Specified Value Sync level : A = 286 18mV (NTSC)
A = 300 18mV (PAL)
Burst level : B = 286 18mV (NTSC)
B = 300 18mV (PAL)
Switch setting:
DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ........................................ OFF
Adjusting method:
button.
3 Check that the sync signal level
(A) satisfies the specified value.
4 Check that the burst signal level
(B) satisfies the specified value.
button.
B
A
Fig. 6-2-5.
6-41
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
2-3. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 1. Overall Level Characteristics Check

Mode PLAY ( ) mode
Switch setting: Recording and playback
REC MODE (DISC SET of Menu setting) ........................ LP Signal 400Hz, -7.5dBs signal:
Note: Reset to SP, after completing adjustments.
AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of
AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Type of disc to use:
DVD-R Measurement Point AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of
AUDIO/VIDEO jack
[Connection of Audio System Measuring Devices] Measuring Instrument Audio level meter
Connect the audio system measuring devices as shown in Fig. 6-2-6. Specified Value -7.5 1.0dBs
Note: In recording mode, input a color bar signal to the video input. Checking Method
1) Input the 400Hz, -7.5dBs signal in the AUDIO L and AUDIO
Recording R terminal.
2) Record the signal.
Pattern generator 3) Playback the recorded section.
Video
Video output (Yellow) 4) Check that the 400Hz signal level is the specified value.
(75 ) Main unit
2. Overall Distortion Check
Mode PLAY ( ) mode
Left AUDIO/VIDEO Recording and playback
Audio oscillator 600 (White)
Signal 400Hz, -7.5dBs signal:
Right AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of
(Red) AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Attenuator
Measurement Point AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of
AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Measuring Instrument Audio distortion meter
Specified Value Below 0.4% (200Hz to 6kHz BPF ON)
600 : 270 (1-249-410-11) + 330 (1-249-411-11)
Checking Method
1) Input the 400Hz, -7.5dBs signal in the AUDIO L and AUDIO
R terminal.
Playback 2) Record the signal.
Main unit 3) Playback the recorded section.
TV monitor
4) Check that the distortion is the specified value.
Video (Yellow)
3. Overall Noise Level Check
AUDIO/VIDEO Left (White) Mode PLAY ( ) mode
Audio level meter Recording and playback
47k or Distortion meter
Right Signal No signal:
AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of
(Red) 47k AUDIO/VIDEO jack
47k (1-249-437-11) Measurement Point AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of
AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter
Specified Value Below -45dBs
Fig. 6-2-6. (IHF-A filter ON, 20kHz LPF ON)
[How to record the line input signal] Checking Method

1) Set the mode dial to PLAY/EDIT ( ). 1) Insert shorting plugs in each of AUDIO L and AUDIO R
2) Press the VISUAL INDEX button so that the line input video terminal.
signal is displayed on the LCD screen 2) Record the signal.
3) Press the REC button. 3) Remove the shorting plugs.
4) Playback the recorded section.
5) Check that the noise level is the specified value.
6-42
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
COVER
6-3. SERVICE MODE

3-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER 2. Precautions upon using
The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the the adjustment remote commander
calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the
adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended
communication with the unit using the remote commander signal that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments
line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
is written in the non-volatile memory.
1. Using the adjustment remote commander

1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC
terminal.
2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to
HOLD (SERVICE position). If it has been properly
connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will
display as shown in Fig. 6-3-1.
Page Data Address
Fig. 6-3-1
3) Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows.

Changing the page
The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is pressed,
and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH button is pressed.
There are altogether 17 pages, from 0 to F, 1F. (Note)
Hexadecimal
notation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
LCD Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F
Decimal notation
conversion value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15
Changing the address

The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed,
and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.
Changing the data (Data setting)
The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed,
and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.
Writing the adjustment data
The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment
data (8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 1F page) in the nonvolatile memory.
(The new adjusting data will not be recorded in the
nonvolatile memory if this step is not performed.)
4) After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power
supply once.
Note: When reading or writing the 1F page data, select page: 0,

address: 10, and set data: 01, then select F page. The 1F page
can be chosen by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10
to 00.
6-43
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
3-2. DATA PROCESS

The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote
commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for
obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case,
after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation,
calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it
as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal
conversion table.
Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table 2

Lower digit of
hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Upper digit (A) (b) (c) (d) (E) (F)
of hexadecimal
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175
1 B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
F (F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Note : The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander.
(Example) If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD (bd);
Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the meeting point
189 of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number.
Table. 6-3-1.
6-44
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
COVER
3-3. SERVICE MODE
1. Setting the Test Mode

Page D Address 10
Data Function
00 Normal
01 Forced MOVIE mode ( )
02 Forced PLAY mode ( )
05 Forced STILL mode ( )
Before setting the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
For page D, the data set will be recorded in the non-volatile
memory by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be
exited even when the main power is turned off.
After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data
of this address to 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment
remote commander. And select page: 0, address: 01, and set data:
00.
2. Bit value discrimination Display on the Bit values

Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the adjustment bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
adjustment remote commander for following items. Use the table remote or or or or
below to discriminate if the bit value is 1 or 0. commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
0 0 0 0 0
Display on the adjustment remote commander
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
Address 6 0 1 1 0
Page bit3 to bit0 discrimination 7 0 1 1 1
bit7 to bit4 discrimination A 8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
A (A) 1 0 1 0
B (b) 1 0 1 1
C (c) 1 1 0 0
D (d) 1 1 0 1
B E (E) 1 1 1 0
F (F ) 1 1 1 1
Example: If 8E is displayed on the adjustment remote commander, the
bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the
bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column.
6-45
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
3. Switch check (1)

Page 7 Address 0E
Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0

0 POWER switch, MODE dial POWER: ON OFF
(XVTR MODE SW) (PS-CX5500 block S007, S004) MODE: PLAY/EDIT ( )
(XVTR MODE SW) (PS-CX5500 block S007, S004) MODE: MOVIE ( )
2 DISPLAY/BATTERRY INFO SW (XBATT VIEW SW) ON OFF
(CK-127 board S5206)
3 OPEN switch (XEJECT SW) (PLUNGER EJECT block) ON OFF
5 PHOTO switch ON OFF
(PHOTO FREEZE SW) (PS-CX5500 block S001)
(XVTR MODE SW) (PS-CX5500 block S007, S004) MODE: STILL ( )
Using method:
1) Select page: 7, address: 0E.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
4. Switch check (2)

Page 7 Address 0C

0 MIC jack (S-N.S. EXT MIC block) (FP-610 flexible) Monaural Stereo
1 MIC jack (S-N.S. EXT MIC block) (FP-610 flexible) Used Not used
2 AUDIO/VIDEO jack (FP-611 flexible) Used Not used
3 S VIDEO jack (MA-420 board J5501) Used Not used
6 AUDIO/VIDEO jack (FP-611 flexible) Used Not used
Using method:
1) Select page: 7, address: 0C.
5. Switch check (3)

Page 7 Address 52

Note2: A personal computer must be connected to the USB jack.

7 USB jack (USB LANC block) Used (Note2) Not used
Using method:
1) Select page: 7, address: 52.
6-46
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
6. Switch check (4)

Page 2 Address 60 to 65, 67
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 60 to 65, 67.
2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be discriminated.
Data
Address 00 19 32 4E 6F 96 EB
(00 to 0C) (0D to 24) (25 to 3F) (40 to 5D) (5F to 81) (82 to AA) (D6 to FF)
PHOTO
60 (PHOTO REC)
(KEY AD0) (PS-CX5500 block) No key input
(IC3103 tl ) (S002)
COLOR SLOW S/
61 BACK LIGHT FADER REVIEW SUPER NS
(KEY AD1) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FP-610 flexible) No key input
(IC3103 y; ) (S5301) (S5303) (S5305) (S9101)
62 STOP PREV PLAY NEXT PAUSE
(KEY AD2) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) No key input
(IC3103 ya ) (S5302) (S5304) (S5306) (S5308) (S5310)
63 FOCUS EXPOSURE VISUAL INDEX SET UP REC PANEL CLOSE PANEL OPEN
(KEY AD3) (KP-CX5500 block) (KP-CX5500 block) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board)
(IC3103 yg ) (S003) (S002) (S5209) (S5210) (S5211) (S5207) (S5207)
PANEL PANEL
64 UP LEFT ENTER RIGHT DOWN REVERSE NORMAL
(KEY AD4) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (FP-612 flexible) (FP-612 flexible)
(IC3103 yh ) (S5212) (S5213) (S5214) (S5215) (S5216) (S9201) (S9201)
65 EDIT VOLUME + VOLUME -
(KEY AD5) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) No key input
(IC3103 yj ) (S5201) (S5204) (S5205)
67 START/STOP
(KEY AD7) (PS-CX5500 block) No key input
(IC3103 yl ) (S003)
7. Record of Use check

Page 7 Address A4 to AC
Note1: This data will be kept even if the lithium battery (CK-127 board BT5201 of the cabinet (R) assembly) is removed.
Address Function Remarks

A4 User initial power Year
A5 on date Month After setting the clock, set the date of power on next
A6 (BCD code) Day
A7 Final condensation Year
A8 occurrence data Month
A9 (BCD code) Day
AA Fault of writing to or erasing Year
AB the flash memory (VC-307 Month
AC board IC3401 )(BCD code) Day
Using method:
1) The record of use data is displayed at addresses: A4 to AC.
6-47
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
8. Record of Self-diagnosis check
Page 7 Address B0 to C6
Note1: This data will be kept even if the lithium battery (CK-127 board
BT5201 of the cabinet (R) assembly) is removed.
Address Self-diagnosis code

B0 Repaired by code (Occurred 1st time) *1
B1 Block function code (Occurred 1st time)
B2 Detailed code (Occurred 1st time)
B4 Repaired by code (Occurred 2nd time) *1
B5 Block function code (Occurred 2nd time)
B6 Detailed code (Occurred 2nd time)
B8 Repaired by code (Occurred 3rd time) *1
B9 Block function code (Occurred 3rd time)
BA Detailed code (Occurred 3rd time)
BC Repaired by code (Occurred 4th time) *1
BD Block function code (Occurred 4th time)
BE Detailed code (Occurred 4th time)
C0 Repaired by code (Occurred 5th time) *1
C1 Block function code (Occurred 5th time)
C2 Detailed code (Occurred 5th time)
C4 Repaired by code (Occurred the last time) *1
C5 Block function code (Occurred the last time)
C6 Detailed code (Occurred the last time)
*1: 01 t C, 03 t E
Using method:
1) The past self-diagnosis codes are displayed at addresses: BC
to C6.
Refer to SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION for detail of the
self-diagnosis code except for the code being written in the
following table.
Self-diagnosis Code
Block Detailed Symptom/State Correction
Repaired by:
Function Code
Data on A page or D page are Make data on A page and D
E 20 00
rewritten. page correct value.
Fault of writing to or erasing the Inspect the flash memory
E 94 00
flash memory (VC-307 board IC3401)
Note: When the fault of writing to or erasing the flash memory (E:94:00) is displayed.
After repair, clear the error information in the following method.
1) Select page:0, address:01, and set data:01.
2) Select page:7, address:00, and set data:EE.
3) Select page:7, address:01, set data:EE and press the PAUSE button.
4) Check that the data of page:7, address:02, changes from 00 to 01.
5) Select page:0, address:01, and set data:00.
6-48
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
OPTICAL AXIS FRAME
Take a copy of OPTICAL AXIS

FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
6-49
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT
For NTSC model
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR

REPRODUCTION FRAME with
a clear sheet for use.

For PAL model

6-50E
COVER
[Description of main button functions on toolbar of the Adobe Acrobat Reader Ver5.0 (for Windows)]
Toolbar
Printing a text Moving with link

1. Click the Print button .
1. Select either palm tool , zoom tool , text selection tool
2. Specify a printer, print range, number of copies, and other op-
tions, and then click [OK]. , or graphic selection tool .
2. Place the pointer in the position in a text where the link exists
(such as a button on cover and the table of contents page, or
Application of printing:
blue characters on the removal flowchart page or drawing
To set a range to be printed within a page, select the graphic
page), and the pointer will change to the forefinger form .
selection tool and drag on the page to enclose a range to 3. Then, click the link. (You will go to the link destination.)
be printed, and then click the Print button.
Moving with bookmark:

Click an item (text) on the bookmark pallet, and you can move
Finding a text to the link destination. Also, clicking can display the
1. Click the Find button . hidden items.
2. Enter a character string to be found into a text box, and click (To go back to original state, click )
the [Find]. (Specify the find options as necessary)
3. Open the find dialog box again, and click the [Find Again] and
you can find the matched character strings displayed next.
(Character strings entered previously are displayed as they are
in the text box.)
Application to the Service Manual:

The parts on the drawing pages (block diagrams, circuit dia-
grams, printed circuit boards) and parts list pages in a text
can be found using this find function. For example, find a
Ref. No. of IC on the block diagram, and click the [Find Again] Zooming or rotating the screen display
continuously, so that you can move to the Ref. No. of IC on Zoom in
the circuit diagram or printed circuit board diagram succes- Select the zoom tool and click the page.
sively. Select the zoom tool and drag a range to be zoomed in.
Note: The find function may not be applied to the Service
Manual depending on the date of issue.
Zoom out
Select the zoom-out tool and click the page.
Switching a page Select the zoom-out tool and drag a range to be zoomed
To move to the first page, click the . out.
To move to the last page, click the .

Zoom in/out
To move to the previous page, click the . Click the triangle button in the zoom control box to select the
To move to the next page, click the . display magnification. Or, you may click or for zoom-
ing in or out.
Reversing the screens displayed once

To reverse the previous screens (operation) one by one, click
the .
To advance the reversed screens (operation) one by one, click Rotate
the . Click rotate tool , and the page then rotates 90 degrees each.
Application to the Service Manual: Application to the Service Manual:

The printed circuit board diagram you see now can be changed
This function allows you to go and back between circuit dia-
to the same direction as the set.
gram and printed circuit board diagram, and accordingly it
will be convenient for the voltage check.
Revision History
S.M. Rev.
issued
DSC-P100/P120
Ver 1.0 2004. 04 SECTION 6 Auto-ADJ
Revision History ADJUSTMENTS
Link
Before starting adjustments SERVICE MODE
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards SERVICE MODE
CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENTS

PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT PROGRAMS
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
ERROR
INITIALIZATION OF DATA
Use this Service Manual together with the Automatic Adjustment Program (DSC-P100_P120 Auto-Adj Ver1.[]r[][].exe) and the Color
Shading Adjustment Program (W1P100ColorShade.exe).
Note: [] (numeric value) of the file name varies depending on the version of Automatic Adjustment Program.
Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service Manual

CONTENTS LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3
1. SERVICE NOTE a
2. DISASSEMBLY a
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS OVERALL
POWER
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND CD-511 FLEXIBLE, CH-146, SY-104 BOARD
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ST-105 FLEXIBLE,
ST-102, MS-207 FLEXIBLE,
JK-266 FLEXIBLE
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST EXPLODED VIEWS
ELECTRICAL PARTS a
(CH-146, SY-104 BOARD)
2004D0500-1
2004.4
9-876-734-51 Sony EMCS Co. Published by DI CS Strategy Div
DSC-P100/P120
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page Section Title Page
6. ADJUSTMENTS
Before Starting Adjustment 6-1 1-6-2. Precautions When an Error Occurred 6-24
1-1. Adjusting Items When Replacing 1-7. Initialization of Data 6-25
Main Parts and Boards 6-2 1. Initializing All Page Data 6-25
6-1. Camera Section Adjustments 6-3 2. Initializing Single Page Data 6-25
1-1. Preparations Before Adjustments 6-3 6-2. Service Mode 6-26
1-1-1. List of Service Tools 6-3 1. Setting the Test Mode 6-26
1-1-2. Preparations 6-4 2. Bit Value Discrimination 6-26
1-1-3. Precautions 6-5 3. LED Check 6-27
1. Setting the Switch 6-5 4. Switch Check (1) 6-27
2. Subjects 6-5 5. Switch Check (2) 6-28
3. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box 6-6 6. Mode Dial Check 6-28
1-1-4. Using Method of SEUS 6-7 7. Self Diagnosis Code 6-28
1. Connection 6-7
2. Operation 6-7 * The color reproduction frame is shown on page 6-29.
1-1-5. Precaution on Use of SEUS 6-7
1-2. Adjustment Programs 6-8
1-2-1. Automatic Adjustment Program 6-8
1. Precautions When Using Automatic Adjustment
Program 6-8
2. Start of Automatic Adjustment Program 6-8
3. Function of Each Button on Main Menu Screen 6-8
1-2-2. Color Shading Adjustment Program 6-9
1. Application Environment 6-9
2. Installation Method 6-9
3. Notes When Using the Color Shading Adjustment
Program 6-9
4. Starting Method of Color Shading Adjustment
Program 6-9
5. Screen and Function of Each Button of
Color Shading Adjustment Program 6-9
1-3. Video System Adjustments 6-10
1-3-1. Function of Each Button on Video System
Adjustment Screen 6-10
1-3-2. Adjustment Items of Video System Adjustment 6-10
1-3-3. Adjusting Method 6-11
1-4. Camera System Adjustments 6-12
1-4-1. Function of Each Button on Camera System
1-4-2. Adjustment Items of Camera System Adjustment 6-13
1. Camera Adjustment 1 6-14
3. Picture Frame Setting (Standard Picture Frame) 6-16
4. Color Shading Adjustment 6-17
1-5. LCD System Adjustments 6-21
1-5-1. Function of Each Button on LCD System
1-5-2. Adjustment Items of LCD System Adjustment 6-21
1-6. Error 6-23
1-6-1.Error Message 6-23
1. Connect Error 6-23
2. Reset the Camera and Try Again 6-23
3. Adjustment Time Out 6-23
4. Adjustment NG 6-23
5. Data Save Error 6-24
2
DSC-P100/P120
SECTION 6
ADJUSTMENTS
Before starting adjustment
EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct.
Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.
Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a
board is replaced.
(Machine before starting repair) PC PC (Machine after a board is replaced)
Save the EVR data Download the saved

to a personal computer. data to a machine.
Procedure 2
Remove the flash memory from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed flash
memory to the replaced board.
Remove the flash memory and install it.
(Former board) (New board)
Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective flash memory, or when the flash memory cannot be removed or
installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired)
Download the data.
Save the data.
(The same model of the same destination)
After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the

respective items of the EVR data.
(Refer to page 6-2 for the items to be checked.)
6-1
DSC-P100/P120
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Note 1: The automatic Adjustment Program does not support the Initialization of data. Perform it manually.
Note 2: Use the Color Shading Adjustment Program (W1P100ColorShade.exe) when performing Color Shading Adjustment of
Camera System Adjustment.
Replaced parts
Block Mounted parts Board Flash memory
replacement replacement replacement replacement
(Timing gen., CCD signal process)
(With built-in flash memory)

(Camera system control)
(AF illumination LED)
Back light unit
(Camera DSP)
(CCD imager)
(Video amp.)
(LCD driver)
LCD901 LCD unit
CD-511 board (COMPLETE)

CH-146 board (COMPLETE)
SY-104 board (COMPLETE)
Adjusting item Adjustment
CD-511 board IC101
CH-146 board IC101

SY-104 board IC301
SY-104 board IC302
SY-104 board IC801
SY-104 board IC502

D901
CD-511 board D104

LCD block
LCD block
Lens block
Flash unit
(Note 1) Initialization of data z z

VIDEO adjustment Video output level adj. z z z z
CAMERA adjustment 1 Flange back adj. z z z z z
CAMERA adjustment 2 Flange back check z z z z z
(Note 2) Color shading adj. z z z z z z z
F No. compensation
Mechanical shutter adj.
Light value adj.
AWB 3200K standard data input
AWB 5800K standard data input
CAMERA adjustment 3 AWB 5800K check z z z z z z z
AWB 3200K check
CCD linearity check
Color reproduction adj.
CCD white defect compensation check
CCD black defect compensation check
Strobe adj.
CAMERA adjustment 4 z z z z z z z z z
Auto focus illumination check
VCO adj.
Contrast adj.
LCD adjustment z z z z z z
V-COM adj.
White Balance adj.
Table 6-1-1
6-2
DSC-P100/P120
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENTS
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS

1-1-1. List of Service Tools
Oscilloscope Color monitor Vectorscope AC power adapter
Calculating machine capable of calculating hexadecimal numbers.
J-1 J-2 J-3

HASP key and application
for adjustment (SEUS)
Personal computer USB cable
(Note) 1-827-038-11
Contact our service headquater of each area
how to get the application for adjustment
(SEUS) and HASP key.
J-4 J-5 J-6
Color bar chart Clear chart
Pattern box PTB-450
J-6082-200-A
For PTB-450: For PTB-450:
or
J-6020-250-A J-6080-621-A
Small pattern box
PTB-1450
For PTB-1450: For PTB-1450:
J-6082-557-A
J-6082-559-A J-6082-560-A
J-7 J-8 J-9
Filter for color

Minipattern box Siemens star chart temperature correction
J-6082-353-B J-6080-875-A (C14)
J-6080-058-A
J-10 J-11 J-12
Background paper Multiple connector USB multi cable

J-2501-130-A 1-818-383-11 1-829-109-11
Note: Personal computer

OS: Windows98/98SE/Me/2000/XP Home/XP Pro
RAM: 256MB or more recommended
USB: 2.0 recommended (also compatible with 1.1)
Two connectors are required.
Fig. 6-1-1
6-3
DSC-P100/P120
1-1-2. Preparations
Pattern box
1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1-3.
2) Start up the application for adjustment (SEUS).
Front of the lens
L = About 28 cm (PTB-450)
L = About 12 cm (PTB-1450)
Fig. 6-1-2
Insert the Memory Stick.

Note: Connect the PC and camera with the USB multi cable (1-829-109-11) without using
the multiple connector (1-818-383-11) when performing CAMERA Adjustment 1.
PC
OS: Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP
HASP Key
USB cable
(1-827-038-11)
To USB
connector
To USB
connector To A/V OUT
jack
AC IN
AC power adaptor
To DC IN jack
Multiple connector
(1-818-383-11)
Vectorscope Color monitor

Terminated Video (yellow)
75
Audio (Black)
Fig. 6-1-3
6-4
DSC-P100/P120
1-1-3. Precautions
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and per-
form adjustments.
1. Mode Dial .......................................... P (Program auto)
2. ZOOM switch (Control switch
block (SW) S002, S003) .................... WIDE end
3. Video Out (SET UP setting) .............. NTSC
4. Digital Zoom (SET UP setting) ......... Off
5. EV (Menu items) ............................... 0EV
6. Focus (Menu items) ........................... Multi AF
7. WB (Menu items) .............................. Auto
8. ISO (Menu items) .............................. Auto
9. Flash Level (Menu items) .................. Normal
10. P.Effect (Menu items) ........................ Off
11. Saturation (Menu items) .................... Normal
12. Contrast (Menu items) ....................... Normal
13. Sharpness (Menu items) .................... Normal
Color bar chart (Standard picture frame)

Electronic beam scanning frame
H
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
C C=D D
Red
Blue
Magenta
Yellow
Green
White
Cyan
Blue
Red
CRT picture frame
B B V
A A=B/2 A Fig. b (monitor TV picture)
Enlargement
Fig. a
(VIDEO terminal of A/V jack
output waveform)
Difference in level
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to
obtain the output waveform shown in Fig a
and the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b.
B
A
Fig. 6-1-4
2. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame).
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, ad-
just the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-4. (Standard pic-
ture frame)
2) Clear chart (Standard picture frame)
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a
clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations dur-
ing this time)
6-5
DSC-P100/P120
3. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box

A dark room is required to provide an accurate flash adjustment.
If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given
below;
1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness.
woody board A (2) woody board B (2) woody board C (1)
400 mm 370 mm 700 mm
513 mm 513 mm 700 mm
730 mm 700 mm
Fig. 6-1-5
2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B.

3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C.
4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper
side of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig. 6-1-6)
woody board A
woody board B
woody board A
woody board B
woody board C
Fig. 6-1-6
6-6
DSC-P100/P120
1-1-4. Using Method of SEUS 2. Operation

Page change
The application for adjustment (SEUS) is used to change the coef- To change the page, click [Page] on the SEUS screen and enter
ficient for calculating the signal processing or EVR data. The SEUS the page to be changed. The page is displayed in hexadecimal
performs two-way communication between PC and set through notation.
the USB terminal. The two-way communication result data can be
written to the nonvolatile memory. Address change
To change the address, click [Address] on the SEUS screen and
1. Connection enter the address to be changed. The address is displayed in
1) Connect the HASP key to the USB terminal of the PC. hexadecimal notation.
2) Connect the PC and set with the USB cable.
3) Confirm that the set starts in the USB mode. Data change
4) Start the SEUS on the PC. To change the data, click [Set] on the SEUS screen and enter
5) Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen. If the connection is nor- the data. The data is displayed in hexadecimal notation.
mal, the SEUS screen will be as shown in Fig. 6-1-7, indicat- This operation does not write the data to the nonvolatile memory.
ing the connected state.
Note: The SEUS will go in disconnect" state, if the set is Data saving
turned off (for instance, by resetting the set). In such a To write the all changed data to the nonvolatile memory, click
case, click [Connect] on the SEUS screen to restore [Save] on the SEUS screen and wait for 3 sec.
the connected state.
Data reading
The data displayed on the SEUS screen are the data values at
the time when the pages and addresses were set, and they are
not updated automatically. To check the data change, click
[Read] on the SEUS screen and update the displayed data.
1-1-5. Precaution on Use of SEUS

Wrong SEUS operation could clear correct adjustment data. To
prevent the data clear by mistake, it is recommended to save all
adjustment data by clicking [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen be-
fore starting the adjustment.
Saving Method:
1) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS
PAGE EDIT screen.
2) Click [Page], and enter the page number to be saved.
3) Click [Page] to read the data to be saved from the camera.
4) Click [File] and save the data to PC.
Loading Method:
1) Select page: 00, address: 01 and set data: 01.
2) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS
PAGE EDIT screen.
3) Click [File] and load the data from PC.
4) Click [Write] on the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen.
Fig. 6-1-7 5) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen.
6) Click [Save] on the SEUS screen.
7) Wait for 3 sec.
8) Select page: 00, address: 01 and set data: 00.
6-7
DSC-P100/P120
1-2. ADJUSTMENT PROGRAMS 3. Function of Each Button on Main Menu Screen

When the Automatic Adjustment Program started, the Main Menu
The DSC-P100/P120 is adjusted with the Automatic Adjustment screen in Fig. 6-1-8 will appear. On this screen, select each adjust-
Program and the Color Shading Adjustment Program. ment section.
The Automatic Adjustment Program automatically controls the
adjustment operations that were formerly entered manually on the
operation screen of the SEUS (some adjustments may be manu-
ally operated on the SEUS operation screen).
The Color Shading Adjustment Program automatically performs
Color Shading Adjustment of Camera System Adjustment. 1
1-2-1. Automatic Adjustment Program 2

1. Precautions When Using Automatic Adjustment
Program
1) The Automatic Adjustment Program writes the adjustment re- 3
sults such as EVR data to the set through two-way communi-
cation with the camera via the SEUS. Accordingly, the Auto- 4
matic Adjustment Program must be used in the environment
where the SEUS operates. Fig. 6-1-8
2) The program run time may vary depending on the environ-
ment of the personal computer used. 1 [VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button
3) Even if the Automatic Adjustment Program is used without The VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen appears.
starting the SEUS, the SEUS will start automatically when the
adjustment is executed. However, it may take time for the SEUS 2 [CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button
to start, and therefore the Automatic Adjustment Program The CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen appears.
should be used with the SEUS started in order to reduce the
program run time. 3 [LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button
The LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen appears.
2. Start of Automatic Adjustment Program
Double-click the application file (DSC-P100_P120 Auto-Adj 4 [END] button
Ver_1.[]r[][].exe), and the Automatic Adjustment Program will start. The Automatic Adjustment Program finishes.
Note: [] (numeric value) of the file name varies depending on the

version of Automatic Adjustment Program.
6-8
DSC-P100/P120
1-2-2. Color Shading Adjustment Program 5. Screen and Function of Each Button of Color
1. Application Environment Shading Adjustment Program
OS: Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP
1
2. Installation Method 2
Extract the file compressed in the ZIP format (W1P100 color
Shade.zip). Execute the extracted file (setup.exe), and the installer 3
will start. Install the program following the instructions given on
the installer screen. 4
3. Notes When Using the Color Shading Adjustment

Program
1) The SEUS must be installed in the PC. A
2) The HASP Key for SEUS must be connected to the USB con- Fig. 6-1-9
nector. The program will not start unless the HASP Key is
connected. 1 Model Select radio button
Selects the model to be adjusted.
4. Starting Method of Color Shading Adjustment
Program 2 [Connect] button
Click the [Start] button on the task bar, and click the [DSC-W1, Makes connection to the camera and switches the camera to
P100 Color Shade Adjustment] from the [Programs], and the the adjustment mode. In the case of successful connection to
program will start. the camera, the indication at the part A changes to Connected
and the [Color Shading Adjustment] button and the [Discon-
nect] button become active.
3 [Color Shading Adjustment] button

Starts the Color Shading Adjustment.
4 [Disconnect] button
Cancels the connection to the camera.
6-9
DSC-P100/P120
1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 1-3-2. Adjustment Items of VIDEO System

Adjustment
1-3-1. Function of Each Button on Video System The adjustment items of video system adjustment are as listed in
Adjustment Screen Table 6-1-2. The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the ad-
Click the [VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button on the Main justment items if the VIDEO Adjustment Start button is clicked.
Menu screen, and the VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen
in Fig. 6-1-10 will appear. Button
Adjustment Signal Page Address
Name
1 VIDEO VIDEO Output
Arbitrary 8F D0
Adjustment Level Adj.
Table 6-1-2
2
4 3
Fig. 6-1-10
1 [To Menu] button

The Main Menu screen comes back.
2 [VIDEO Adjustment Start] button

Video Adjustment starts.
3 [Reset] button
This button functions same as the Reset button of the camera.
4 [Release Data Setting] button

The data setting at the adjustment is cancelled.
During the data setting, the button color changes from white
to red. When the data setting is cancelled, the button color
returns to white.
(Use this button when an error occurred in the video adjust-
ment. If the adjustment completed successfully, the data set-
ting is automatically cancelled and the button color returns to
white.)
6-10
DSC-P100/P120
1-3-3. Adjusting Method SEUS operation screen

[Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and UP/DOWN key
sequence]
1. Data Setting during Video Adj.
2. Video Output Level Adj.
3. Release of Data Setting during Video Adj.
[Specified value of video output level adj.]
Measurement Point Video terminal of AV OUT jack

of the multiple connector
(75 terminated)
Specified Value Sync level:
A = 286 5 mV (NTSC mode)
A = 300 5 mV (PAL mode)
Burst level:
B = 286 30 mV (NTSC mode)
Fig. 6-1-13
B = 300 30 mV (PAL mode)
[Adjusting method]
1) Click the [VIDEO Adjustment Start] button.
2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the 1. Data Set-
ting during Video Adj..
3) If 1. Data Setting during Video Adj. completed successfully,
the next message is displayed during the execution of 2. Video
Output Level Adj.. Using the UP/DOWN key on the SEUS
Operation screen, adjust so that the sync level of the video B
signals satisfies the specified value. After the adjustment, check
that the burst level of the video signals satisfies the specified A
value, and click the [OK] button in the message.
Fig. 6-1-14
Fig. 6-1-11
4) If the [OK] button button is clicked, 3. Release of Data Set-

ting during Video Adj. will be executed.
5) Upon successful completion of all items of the VIDEO adjust-
ment, the following message is displayed. Click the [OK] but-
ton.
Fig. 6-1-12
6-11
DSC-P100/P120
1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
1-4-1. Function of Each Button on Camera System

Adjustment Screen
Click the [CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button on the Main
Menu screen, and the CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
screen in Fig. 6-1-15 will appear.
Fig. 6-1-15
1 [To Menu] button

2 Adjustment start buttons

[CAMERA Adjustment 1 Start] button
Camera Adjustment 1 starts.
3 [Reset] button

returns to white.
(Use this button when an error occurred in the camera adjust-
ment 1-4. If the adjustment completed successfully, the data
setting is automatically cancelled and the button color returns
to white.)
6-12
DSC-P100/P120
1-4-2. Adjustment Items of Camera System Adjust-

ment
The adjustment items of camera system adjustment are as listed in
Table 6-1-3. The Automatic Adjustment Program divides the ad-
justment items into four, camera adjustment 1-4. Clicking either
CAMERA Adjustment Start button allows the adjustment item
which corresponds to that button to be executed.
The adjustment conditions of the subject and filter vary depend-
ing on which item is adjusted. The Adjustment Program displays
an instruction for the subject and filter as a message during the
adjustment.
Adjustment Adjustment
Button Name Adjustment Subject
Page Address
Siemens star chart with ND filter 6D B0 to B7, C0 to C7
CAMERA Adjustment 1 Flange Back Adj.
for minipattern box (Note 1) 6F 18 to 53
Siemens star chart with ND filter
CAMERA Adjustment 2 Flange Back Check (1.0m from front the lens)
(Luminance: 200 to 400 lux)
(Note 2) Color Shading Adj. Clear chart (Standard picture frame)
F No. Compensation 6F 60 to 64, 6B to 6D
Mechanical Shutter Adj. 6F 6B to 6D, B8 to D7
Clear chart (Standard picture frame)
Light Value Adj. 6F 65 to 67
AWB 3200K Standard Data Input 6E 04 to 21, 42, 43
Clear chart (Standard picture frame) 00 to 03, 24 to 41,
AWB 5800K Standard Data Input 6E
Filter C14 for color temperature 44, 45
AWB 5800K Check correction
CAMERA Adjustment 3
AWB 3200K Check
CCD Linearity Check
Color ber chart
Color Reproduction Adj. 6E 60 to 67
(Standard picture frame)
CCD White Defect
Compensation Check
CCD Black Defect
Compensation Check
6E 72 to 75
Strobe Adj.
CAMERA Adjustment 4 Flash adjustment box 6F D8 to EF
Auto Focus Illumination Check 6F 10 to 15
Note 1: Dark Siemens star chart.

Note 2: Use the Color Shading Adjustment Program
(W1P100ColorShade.exe) when performing Color
Shading Adjustment of Camera System Adjustment.
Table 6-1-3
6-13
DSC-P100/P120
1-4-3. Adjusting Method Preparation of Flange Back Adj.

1. CAMERA Adjustment 1 1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following fig-
Note: Connect the PC and camera with the USB multi cable (1- ure.
829-109-11) without using the multiple connector (1-818- Note 1: The attachment lenses are not used.
383-11) when performing CAMERA Adjustment 1. Note 2: Take care not to hit the mini-pattern box when ex-
tending the lens.
[Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and 2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and
sequence] the front of lens of camera is less than 3 cm.
1. Data Setting during Camera Adj. 3) Make the height of minipattern box and the camera equal.
2. Flange Back Adj. 4) Check the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the
3. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. specified voltage 0.01 Vdc.
5) Check that the center of Siemens star chart meets the center of
[Adjusting method] shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE end and WIDE
1) Click the [CAMERA Adjustment 1 Start] button. end respectively.
2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes 1. Data Setting
during Camera Adj.. Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the
3) Upon successful completion of the 1. Data Setting during minipattern box, so adjustment the power sup-
Camera Adj., the following message is displayed. Set the sub- ply output voltage to the specified voltage writ-
ject by referring to Preparation of Flange Back Adj.. ten on the sheet which is supplied with the mini-
pattern box.
Below 3 cm
Minipattern box
Camera
Fig. 6-1-16
Regulated power supply
4) If the [OK] button is clicked, 2. Flange Back Adj. and 3. Output voltage : Specified voltage 0.01 Vdc
Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. will be executed. Output current : more than 3.5 A
5) Upon successful completion of all items of the CAMERA
Adjustment 1, the following message is displayed. Click the
[OK] button. Red (+)
Black ()
Yellow (SENS +)
White (SENS ) Need not connected

Black (GND)
Fig. 6-1-18
Fig. 6-1-17
6-14
DSC-P100/P120
2. CAMERA Adjustment 2 6) Upon successful completion of all items of the CAMERA

[Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and Adjustment 2, the following message is displayed. Click the
sequence] [OK] button.
1. Data Setting during Camera Adj.
2. Flange Back Check
3. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj.
[Adjusting method]
1) Click the [CAMERA Adjustment 2 Start] button.
2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes 1. Data Setting
during Camera Adj..
3) Upon successful completion of the 1. Data Setting during Fig. 6-1-21
Camera Adj., the following message is displayed. Set the sub-
ject in accordance with the message.
Fig. 6-1-19
4) Click the [OK] button is clicked, 2. Flange Back Check is

executed. The following messages are displayed, and then op-
erate the cameral to make a check in accordance with the mes-
sages.
Fig. 6-1-20
5) Upon completion of 2. Flange Back Check, 3. Release of

Data Setting during Camera Adj. is executed.
6-15
DSC-P100/P120
3. Picture Frame Setting (Standard Picture Frame)

In the Color Shading Adjustment and CAMERA Adjustment
3, set the picture frame so as to attain the positions shown in the
following figure when shooting the color bar chart.
Measurement Point: Video terminal of A/V OUT jack of the mul-

tiple connector (75 terminated)
1. Horizontal period
B
A=C=
2
A C
B
Fig. 6-1-22
2. Vertical period
E E=F F
Fig. 6-1-23
Check on the monitor TV

B
A=C=
2
A B C
E=F
Color bar chart picture frame

Effective picture frame
Fig. 6-1-24
6-16
DSC-P100/P120
4. Color Shading Adjustment 7) Click the [Color Shading Adjustment] button.

[Adjustment method]
1) Start the Color Shading Adjustment Program
(W1P100ColorShade.exe).
2) Select DSC-P100 with the Model Select radio button.
Fig. 6-1-27
8) A picture captured by the camera is displayed on the screen,

and the adjustment and checking are performed.
Fig. 6-1-25
3) Click the [Connect] button to set the camera to the adjust-

ment mode.
Fig. 6-1-28
9) Upon successful completion of the adjustment, the following

message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-26
4) Adjust the mode dial of the camera to P and with the zoom
at WIDE end, shoot the color bar chart.
5) Adjust the camera direction and distance to set the picture frame.
(Refer to 3. Picture Frame Setting)
6) Remove the color bar chart in the pattern box, and set the clear
chart.
Note: At this time, nothing must be reflected in the clear chart. Fig. 6-1-29
6-17
DSC-P100/P120
5. CAMERA Adjustment 3 5) Upon successful completion of the AWB 3200K Check, the
[Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and following message is displayed. Set the filter in accordance
sequence] with the message.
1. Data Setting during Camera Adj.
2. Picture Frame Setting
3. F No. Compensation
4. Mechanical Shutter Adj.
5. Light Value Adj.
6. AWB 3200K Standard Data Input
7. AWB 5800K Standard Data Input
8. AWB 5800K Check Fig. 6-1-32
9. AWB 3200K Check
10. CCD Linearity Check 6) Click the [OK] button, and the 7. AWB 5800K Standard Data
11. Color Reproduction Adj. Input and 8. AWB 5800K Check will be executed.
12. CCD White Defect Compensation Check 7) Upon successful completion of the AWB 5800K Check, the
13. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check following message is displayed. Set the filter in accordance
14. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. with the message.
[Adjusting method]
2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the 1. Data Set-
ting during Camera Adj..
3) Upon successful completion of 1. Data Setting during Cam-
era Adj., 2. Picture Frame Setting is executed. The follow-
ing message is displayed, and then referring to Fig. 6-1-22 to Fig. 6-1-33
Fig. 6-1-24 (See page 6-16), set the subject and click the [OK]
button. 8) Click the [OK] button, and the 9. AWB 3200K Check and
10. CCD Linearity Check will be executed.
9) Upon successful completion of 10. CCD Linearity Check,
the following message is displayed. Change the chart in ac-
cordance with the message.
Fig. 6-1-30
After that, the next message is displayed. Then, change the chart
in accordance with the message. Fig. 6-1-34
Fig. 6-1-31
4) Click the [OK] button, and the items from 3. F No. Compen-
sation to 6. AWB 3200K Standard Data Input will be ex-
ecuted.
6-18
DSC-P100/P120
10) Click the [OK] button, and 11. Color Reproduction Adj. will Check on the vectorscope
be executed. The following messages are displayed in order,
and then operate the vectorscope to make a check with the R-Y
color reproduction frame in accordance with the message.
MG
R
YE
W
B-Y
G
CY
Fig. 6-1-35 Burst Position
11) Upon successful completion of 11. Color Reproduction Adj., Fig. 6-1-38
the following message is displayed. Change the chart in ac-
cordance with the message.
Fig. 6-1-36
12) Click the [OK] button, and the 12. CCD White Defect Com-
pensation Check, 13. CCD Black Defect Compensation
Check and 14. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj.
will be executed.
13) Upon successful completion of all items of the CAMERA
Adjustment 3, the following message is displayed. Click the
[OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-37
6-19
DSC-P100/P120
6. CAMERA Adjustment 4 6) Upon successful completion of 2. Strobe Adj., 3. Auto Fo-

Note: CAMERA Adjustment 4 is available only once after the cus Illumination Check is executed.
power is turned on. If the adjustment is retried, turn off the 7) Upon successful completion of the 3. Auto Focus Illumina-
power and turn on again. tion Check, the 4. Release of Data Setting during Camera
Adj. will be executed successively.
[Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and 8) Upon successful completion of all items of the CAMERA
sequence] Adjustment 4, the following message is displayed. Click the
1. Data Setting during Camera Adj. [OK] button.
2. Strobe Adj.
3. Auto Focus Illumination Check
4. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj.
[Adjusting method]
2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the 1. Data
Setting during Camera Adj.. Fig. 6-1-41
3) Upon successful completion of the 1. Data Setting during
Camera Adj., the following message is displayed. Set the sub-
ject in accordance with the message.
(For the Flash adjustment box, refer to 3. Preparing the Flash
Adjustment Box (see page 6-6).)
Fig. 6-1-39
4) Press the [OK] button, and the 2. Strobe Adj. will be ex-
ecuted.
5) During execution of 2. Strobe Adj., the following message
is displayed. After checking the flashing of strobe light, click
the [OK] button. (This message is displayed 2 times during
execution of adjustment.)
Fig. 6-1-40
6-20
DSC-P100/P120
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 1-5-2. Adjustment Items of LCD System Adjustment
The adjustment items of LCD system adjustment are as listed in
1-5-1. Function of Each Button on LCD System Table 6-1-4. The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the ad-
Adjustment Screen justment items if the LCD Adjustment Start button is clicked.
Click the [LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button on the Main
Menu screen, and the LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen in Button
Adjustment Signal Page Address
Fig. 6-1-42 will appear. Name
1 VCO adj. 8F 23
LCD Contrast adj. 8F 2C
Arbitrary
Adjustment V-COM adj. 8F 24
White Balance adj. 8F 28, 2A
2
Table 6-1-4
4 3
Fig. 6-1-42
1 [To Menu] button

2 [LCD Adjustment Start] button

LCD Adjustment starts.
3 [Reset] button

returns to white.
(Use this button when an error occurred in the LCD adjust-
ment. If the adjustment completed successfully, the data set-
ting is automatically cancelled and the button color returns to
white.)
6-21
DSC-P100/P120
1-5-3. Adjusting Method SEUS operation screen

[Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and UP/DOWN key
sequence]
1. Data Setting during LCD Adj.
2. VCO Adj.
3. Contrast Adj.
4. V-COM Adj.
5. White Balance Adj.
6. Release of Data Setting during LCD Adj.
[Adjusting method]
1) Click the [LCD Adjustment Start] button.
2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the items from
1. Data Setting during LCD Adj. to 3. Contrast Adj..
3) Upon successful completion of the 3. Contrast Adj., the fol-
lowing message is displayed during execution in 4. V-COM
Adj.. On the SEUS screen, operate the UP/DOWN key so
that the brightness of portions A and B on the LCD panel is
equal. After the adjustment, click the [OK] button. Fig. 6-1-46
Check on the LCD screen (V-COM Adj.)
B A
A B
Fig. 6-1-43
4) Upon completion of 4. V-COM Adj., 5. White Balance Adj. B A

is executed. The following message is displayed, and then check
that LCD screen is not colored. A B
If colored, change the data of page: 8F, address: 28 and 2A on
the SEUS Operation screen to adjust so that the LCD screen is
not colored. Fig. 6-1-47
Fig. 6-1-44
5) If the [OK] button is clicked, 6. Release of Data Setting dur-

ing LCD Adj. will be executed.
Fig. 6-1-45
6-22
DSC-P100/P120
1-6. ERROR 3. Adjustment Time Out
In case of an error during the execution of adjustment, the Auto-

matic Adjustment Program interrupts the processing at that point,
and displays an error message, and then terminates the program
execution there. This part indicates
the adjustment
1-6-1. Error Message item in which
When an error message is displayed, perform the remedy given an error occurred.
below, and then retry adjustment. If the error message is displayed
though the remedy was performed, the circuits will be faulty. Fig. 6-1-50
1. Connect Error Symptom Adjustment does not finish within the specified
time.
Cause Adjustment conditions are wrong.
Data error exists in the camera.
Remedy Check that the conditions such as a subject
are correct.
Reset the camera.
4. Adjustment NG
Fig. 6-1-48
Symptom USB communication with the set is abnormal.

Cause USB cable is not inserted tightly.
This part indicates
Power supply is not installed correctly.
the adjustment
Communication with SEUS is abnormal. item in which
Remedy Disconnect the USB cable once, and then re- an error occurred.
connect it tightly and check that the set is in
USB Mode. Fig. 6-1-51
Install the power supply correctly.
Start the SEUS and click the [Connect] to Symptom The adjusted data does not become the speci-
check that the connection state is established. fied value.
Cause Adjustment conditions are wrong.
Data error exists in the camera.
2. RESET the CAMERA and Try Again Remedy Check that the conditions such as a subject
are correct.
Reset the camera.
Fig. 6-1-49
Symptom The camera is not ready for adjustment.

Cause Data error exists in the camera.
Remedy Reset the camera.
6-23
DSC-P100/P120
5. Data Save Error 1-6-2. Precautions When an Error Occurred

The Automatic Adjustment Program sets the data for adjustment
before the adjustment starts. Accordingly, if the adjustment termi-
nates by an error, the data during the adjustment may be left in the
camera.
Note 1: With this data left in the camera, the camera will not
operate normally.
In this case, the [Release Data Setting] button is displayed in

red on the screen as shown in Fig. 6-1-53, 54 and 55. Click the
[Release Data Setting] button to cancel the data setting. When
How to cancel the
the data setting is cancelled, the button color becomes white.
data setting during
adjustment is Note 2: When Data Save Error occurred, the [Release Data
display here. Setting] button is displayed in white.
To cancel the data setting, perform it on the SEUS Op-
Fig. 6-1-52 eration screen. How to cancel the data setting is displayed
in the error message.
Symptom data cannot be saved normally. (The data set-
ting during adjustment cannot be cancelled) Video System Adjustment screen
Cause Data writing to the flash memory failed.
Connection is faulty.
Power supply is not installed correctly.
Remedy On the SEUS Operation screen, [Set] the data
to the pages and addresses displayed in the
message, and [Save] them. (Cancel manu-
ally the data setting during adjustment.)
Check the connection.
Install the power supply correctly.
Fig. 6-1-53
Camera System Adjustment screen
Fig. 6-1-54
LCD System Adjustment screen
Fig. 6-1-55
6-24
DSC-P100/P120
1-7. INITIALIZATION OF DATA 2. Initializing Single Page Data

By performing the following procedure, data of the page that you
1. Initializing All Page Data want to initialize will be initialized.
By performing the following procedure, data of all pages will be Note 1: If the 6D or 6E or 6F page data have been initialized, the
initialized. following adjustment needs to be performed again.
Note: If all page data have been initialized, all adjustments need 1) Camera system adjustments
to be performed again. Note 2: If the 8F page data have been initialized, the following
adjustment needs to be performed again.
Initializing Method: 1) Video system adjustments
1) Select page: 00, address: 01 and set data: 01. 2) LCD system adjustments
2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS
SECTOR WRITE screen. Initializing Method:
3) Check that the SET ID is 0B. 1) Select page: 00, address: 01 and set data: 01.
4) Click [All] of the ALL SELECT buttons to select all pages. 2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS
(Fig. 6-1-56 A) SECTOR WRITE screen.
5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the flash memory 3) Check that the SET ID is 0B.
of the camera. 4) Click All of the option buttons of target page. (Fig. 6-1-56
6) Wait for 3 sec. B)
7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS SECTOR WRITE screen. 5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the flash memory
8) Select page: 8E, address: 00 and set data: 20. of the camera.
9) Click [Save] on the SEUS screen. 6) Wait for 3 sec.
10) Wait for 3 sec. 7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS SECTOR WRITE screen.
8) When 8E page is initialized, select page: 8E, address: 00 and
Processing after Completing Initializing set data: 20.
9) Click [Save] on the SEUS screen.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 10) Wait for 3 sec.
1 20 00 29 [Set]
2 20 01 29 [Set] (Note) Processing after Completing Initializing
Note: At this time, the camera is reset and the power is turns off 1 20 00 29 [Set]
once and then on again. Accordingly, the message Re-
2 20 01 29 [Set] (Note)
ceive Packet Error is displayed on the SEUS screen, and
the SEUS goes in disconnect state, but this is not a
trouble. Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen to restore Note: At this time, the camera is reset and the power is turns off
the connected state. (In case that the power does not turn once and then on again. Accordingly, the message Re-
on again, press the power button.) ceive Packet Error is displayed on the SEUS screen, and
the SEUS goes in disconnect state, but this is not a
B
trouble. Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen to restore
the connected state. (In case that the power does not turn
on again, press the power button.)
0B
Fig. 6-1-56
6-25
DSC-P100/P120
6-2. SERVICE MODE 2. Bit Value Discrimination

In the following items, the bit values must be discriminated from
1. Setting the Test Mode the data displayed on the SEUS. Whether bit values are 1 or 0
can be discriminated from the table shown below.
Page 2F Address 23
Data displayed on SEUS
Data Function
80
00
01
Normal
Forced CAMERA (Auto) mode
Forced CAMERA (Program Auto) mode
00
bit 3 to bit 0 discriminated
02 Forced PLAY mode
bit 7 to bit 4 discriminated
03 Forced SET UP mode
04 Forced MOVIE mode
05 Forced CAMERA (Manual) mode Bit values
Display on the bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Before setting the data, select page: 00, address: 01, and set SEUS or or or or
data: 01. bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
For page: 2F, the data set is recorded in non-volatile memory by
0 0 0 0 0
saving data. In this case, the Test mode is not released even if
the camera is turned off, thus requiring extreme care. 1 0 0 0 1
After completing adjustments/repairs, release the data setting. 2 0 0 1 0
1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 3 0 0 1 1
2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and set data: 80.
3) Save the data. 4 0 1 0 0
4) Wait for 3 sec. 5 0 1 0 1
5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00. 6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
A 8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
A 1 0 1 0
B 1 0 1 1
C 1 1 0 0
D 1 1 0 1
B E 1 1 1 0
F 1 1 1 1
Example: If the displayed data is 8E, bit 7 - bit 4 values can be

discriminated from block (A), and also bit 3 - bit 0 val-
ues from block (B).
6-26
DSC-P100/P120
3. LED Check
Page 20 Address 04
Page 80 Address 12
Page 8E Address FE
Using method:
3) Select page: 8E, address: FE, and set data: 20.
5) Check that all LED are lit.
SELF TIMER/AF ILLUMINATOR
SELF TIMER/RECORRDING
AE/AF LOCK
FLASH CHARGE
MS ACCESS
8) Select page: 8E, address: FE, and set data: 00.
10) Click [Disconnect] on the SEUS screen.
11) Disconnect the USB cable.
12) Turn off the power.
4. Switch Check (1)
Page 80 Address 13
Function When data = 00 When data = 01 When data = 02

Shutter button
(XAE LOCK SW) OFF ON ON
(CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL) S001)
Shutter button
(XSHTR ON SW) OFF OFF ON
(CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL) S001)
Using method:
1) Select page: 80, address: 13.
2) By discriminating the read data, the state of the switches can
be discriminated.
6-27
DSC-P100/P120
5. Switch Check (2)
Page 20 Addresses 90 to 92
Using method:
1) Select page: 20, addresses: 90 to 92.
2) By discriminating the read data, the pressed key can be dis-
criminated.
Data
Address
00 to 0C 0D to 28 29 to 4A 4B to 77 78 to E4 E5 to FF
IMAGE SIZE/
MENU CONTROL DOWN CONTROL UP
90 DELETE
(Control switch (Control switch (Control switch
(KEY AD0) (Control switch No key input
block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW))
(IC401 J6 ) block (SW))
(S005) (S010) (S006)
(S008)
DISPLAY/
CONTROL LEFT CONTROL SET CONTROL RIGHT
91 LCD ON/OFF
(Control switch (Control switch (Control switch
(KEY AD1) (Control switch No key input
block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW))
(IC401 H6 ) block (SW))
(S004) (S007) (S009)
(S011)
ZOOM W ZOOM T
92
(Control switch (Control switch
(KEY AD2) No key input
block (SW)) block (SW))
(IC401 G6 )
(S002) (S003)
6. Mode Dial Check
Page 20 Addresses 95, 96
Using method:
1) Select page: 20, addresses: 95 and 96.
2) By discriminating the read data, the state of the mode dial can be discriminated.
Data
Address
00 to 0C 0D to 28 29 to 4A 4B to 77 78 to 9B 9C to E4 E5 to FF
95 AUTO P (Program Auto) PLAY SET UP MOVIE M (manual)
(MODE DIAL0) (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch Others
(IC401 J8 ) block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW))
96 SCN
(MODE DIAL1) (Control switch Others
(IC401 J9 ) block (SW))
7. Self Diagnosis Code
Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error
C:32:ss Turn the power off and on again. Trouble with hardware. SYSTEM ERROR
Format the Memory stick. Unformatted memory stick is inserted. FORMAT ERROR
C:13:ss
Insert a new Memory Stick. Memory stick is broken. MEMORY STICK ERROR
When failed in the focus and zoom
E:61:ss Checking of lens drive circuit.
initialization.

Checking of flash unit or replacement Abnormality when flash is being
E:91:ss
of flash unit. charged.
6-28
DSC-P100/P120
FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR

REPRODUCTION FRAME with a
For NTSC mode
clear sheet for use.
R-Y
MG
R
YE
W
B-Y
G
CY
DSC-P100/P120

6-29E
6-29
Revision History
S.M. Rev.
issued

Sony DCR-DVD100 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sony DCR-DVD100 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sony DCR-DVD100 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E RMT-820

SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2

SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS REPAIR PARTS LIST

DISASSEMBLY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987627341.pdf).

On the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 board

Digital Video Camera Recorder

* Manufactured under license Design and specifications are

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

Exploded view and parts list of MD-097 BLOCK are

5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST 5-12

Electrical parts list of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-

1-1. SERVICE NOTE

2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)

3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE OPTICAL PICK-UP 4. PRECAUTION FOR CHECKING EMISSION OF

1-2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

Viewfinder or LCD screen

Repaired by: Block Detailed Code

3. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE

Block Detailed Symptom/State Correction

C 0 4 0 0 Non-standard battery is used. Use the InfoLITHIUM battery.

Note: Refer to 8. Record of Self-diagnosis check of 6-3. SERVICE

DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK

PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE VC-307 BOARD.

1 2-1. F PANEL SECTION ..................................... (page 2-2)

NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2 Screw (M1.7 4),

4 Screw (M1.7 4), 6 FP-605 flexible board

5 Screw (M1.7 4),

1 Screw (M1.7 4),

2-2. MA-420 BOARD

2-3. CABINET (R) SECTION

2 Two screws (M1.7 4),

q; FP-602 flexible board

8 FP-602 flexible board 3 Screw (M1.7 4),

9 Cabinet (R) section 7 CPC lid (bottom)

6 Two screws (M1.7 4),

2-4. SIDE CABINET (25) ASSEMBLY

3 Set the LCD panel,

2 Screw (M1.7 4),

5 Side cabinet (25) assembly

2-5. P CABINET (C)(25M) ASSEMBLY

2 Screw (M1.7 4),

4 P cabinet (C) (25) assembly

1 Screw (M1.7 4),

[PD-188 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

2-6. LCD UNIT

2-7. PD-188 BOARD

3 Five claws 2 Two screws

2-8. LIQUID CRYSTAL INDICATOR MODULE

1 P frame assembly (25)

7 P cabinet (M) (25)

2-9. LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY

7 FP-612 flexible board

6 Hinge cover (O) (25)

1 FP-607 flexible board (6P)